Rx4640 Maintenance

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 232

hp Integrity rx4640

Operation and Maintenance Guide


Regulatory Model Number: RSVLA-0201
Version 3.0

Manufacturing Part Number: rx4640_OpMaint


April 2004

U.S.A.
© Copyright 2003-2004 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P..
Legal Notices
Copyright Notices. © Copyright 2003-2004 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set
forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. HP-UX Release 10.20 and later and HP-UX Release
11.00 and later (in both 32 and 64-bit configurations) on all HP 9000 computers are Open Group UNIX 95 branded products.
Intel and Itanium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other
countries. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group. Windows is
a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation of this document without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed
under the copyright laws.
Related Documents. The HP Server Documentation CD-ROM has been provided with your server. It contains a complete
documentation set for the server, including localized versions of key documents. Included on the CD-ROM are the Site
Preparation and Operations and Maintenance guides, which contain in-depth troubleshooting, installation, and repair
information.
The CD will autorun when you insert it into a Windows® workstation, or, point your browser at the index.htm file located
under the Start directory of the CD. All users, including UNIX®/Linux, can access a complete manual set by viewing the
directory manuals. The manuals are in Adobe® Acrobat® Reader (pdf) format.

IMPORTANT The latest versions of these documents, and any updates to these documents, are posted under the appropriate
server at http://docs.hp.com.

Where to Get Help. For online access to technical support information, self-solve tools, online assistance, community forums
of IT experts, broad multivendor knowledge base, and monitoring and diagnostic tools, go to http://www.hp.com/support.

2
Contents

1. About This Document


What’s in This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
HP Encourages Your Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Where to Get Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Information to Collect Before You Contact Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

2. Controls, Ports, and Indicators


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Switch/Button and Front Control Panel LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Additional Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Hot-Plug Disk Drive Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
DVD–ROM/DVD-R/DVD-RW Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
QuickFind Diagnostic Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Power Supply Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Management Processor LAN LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Locator LED and Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Gigabit Ethernet Card LAN LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

3. External Connectors
Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
VGA Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Management Processor LAN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Additional Ports on Accessory Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

4. Installing Additional Components and Configuring


Installing Power Supplies and Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Installing Hot-Swap Power Supply Units (PSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Installing Hot-Plug Disk Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Installing Processors and Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Installing Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Installing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Hot-Plug PCI-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Hot-Plug PCI-X Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Operating System Support for Hot-Plug PCI-X Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
PCI-X Hardware and Software Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
PCI-X Slot Locations and Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Hot-Plug Operation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Understanding LEDs and Hardware Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Converting SCSI From Simplex to Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

3
Contents

Accessing the SCSI Backplane Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65


Convert to Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Replacing the Removed Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Core I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Management Processor (MP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Accessing the Management Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Configuring Management Processor LAN Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Management Processor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Fibre Channel (FC) Boot Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Booting the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

5. Utilities
Extensible Firmware Interface (EFI) Boot Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
EFI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
EFI/POSSE Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
baud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
boottest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
cpuconfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
default. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
errdump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
lanaddress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
monarch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
pdt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
sysmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Specifying SCSI Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Using the SCSI Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Management Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Accessing the Management Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Management Processor Command Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Management Processor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Reset BMC Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Configure Serial Port Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Certificate Generate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Console Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Command Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Connect to Service Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Default Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Display FRUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Disconnect Remote or LAN Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Front Panel Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
MP Firmware Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

4
Contents

Display System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115


Inactivity Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Configure LAN Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
LAN Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Return to Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Modem Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Modem Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Configure Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Power Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Reset BMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Reset System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Set Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Create Local Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Display Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Security Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Firmware Revision Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Transfer Of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Tell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
User Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Virtual Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Who . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Exit from MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Management Processor Help System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

6. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Troubleshooting Methodology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Possible Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
The system will not power-up.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
The system will not boot.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
The system has intermittent failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
The system LED or Diagnostic LEDs are not on and no error messages appear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Power goes off on the server and does not come back on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Front Control Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
I/O Baseboard LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Troubleshooting Using Online Support Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Support Tools Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Event Monitoring Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Instant Support Enterprise Edition (ISEE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Offline Diagnostic Environment (ODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

5
Contents

e-Diagtools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Management Processor (MP) Event Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Other Event Logs and General Diagnostic Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Hypothetical Troubleshooting Scenario. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

7. Removing and Replacing Components


Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Service Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Accessing a Rack Mounted Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Extend the Server from the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Insert the Server into the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Accessing a Pedestal Mounted Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Front Bezel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Removing the Front Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Replacing the Front Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Front and Top Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Removing the Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Replacing the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Removing the Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Replacing the Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
System Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Memory Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Removing a Memory Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Replacing a Memory Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
System Memory DIMMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Removing System Memory DIMMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Installing Memory DIMMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Processor Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Removing the Processor Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Replacing the Processor Extender Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Installing Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Removing a Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Replacing a Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Hot-Swap Chassis Fan Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Removing a Hot-Swap Chassis Fan Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Replacing a Hot-Swap Chassis Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
I/O Baseboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Removing the I/O Baseboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Replacing the I/O baseboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Hot-Plug PCI-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Hot-Plug PCI-X Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Operating System Support for Hot-Plug PCI-X Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
PCI-X Hardware and Software Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
PCI-X Slot Locations and Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Hot-Plug Operation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

6
Contents

Understanding LEDs and Hardware Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187


OLX Dividers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Removing an OLX Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Replacing an OLX Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Voltage Regulator Modules (VRM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Removing a Voltage Regulator Module (VRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Replacing a Voltage Regulator Module (VRM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Hot-Plug Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Removing a Hot-Plug Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Replacing a Hot-Plug Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
SCSI Backplane Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Removing the SCSI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Replacing the SCSI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Midplane Riser Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Removing the Midplane Riser Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Replacing the Midplane Riser Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Hot-Swap Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Power Supply Load Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Removing a Hot-Swap Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Replacing a Hot-Swap Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Power Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Removing the Power Distribution Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Replacing the Power Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
DVD Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Removing a DVD Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Replacing a DVD Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
DVD I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Removing a DVD I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Replacing a DVD I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Display Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Removing the Display Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Replacing the Display Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
QuickFind Diagnostic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Removing the QuickFind Diagnostic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Replacing the QuickFind Diagnostic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

8. Parts Information
Field Replaceable Parts (FRU) List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

9. Specifications
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Server Component Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

7
Contents

8
Figures

Figure 2-1. Front View with Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16


Figure 2-2. Accessing the Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Figure 2-3. Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Figure 2-4. Hot-Swap Disk Drive LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Figure 2-5. DVD–ROM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Figure 2-6. QuickFind Diagnostic Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Figure 2-7. I/O Baseboard LEDs, Buttons, and Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Figure 2-8. Rack Mount and Pedestal Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Figure 2-9. Power Supply Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Figure 2-10. MP LAN LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Figure 2-11. Core I/O LAN Port LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Figure 3-1. Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Figure 3-2. USB Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Figure 3-3. Video Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Figure 3-4. Serial Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Figure 3-5. Management Processor Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Figure 3-6. LAN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Figure 3-7. SCSI Port, Ultra 3, 68-Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Figure 4-1. Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Figure 4-2. Hot-Swap Power Supply in P 0 Slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Figure 4-3. Metal Cover in Unused P 1 Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Figure 4-4. Disk Drive Installation in Slots 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Figure 4-5. Disk Drive Installation in Slot 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Figure 4-6. Volume Filler Installation in Slot 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Figure 4-7. Removing the Processor Extender Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Figure 4-8. Removing Processor Extender Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Figure 4-9. Processor Cable Placed Correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Figure 4-10. Processor Cable Placed Incorrectly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Figure 4-11. Installing Processor on Extender Board Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Figure 4-12. 16 DIMM Extender Board Minimum Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Figure 4-13. 32 DIMM Extender Board Minimum Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Figure 4-14. Inserting DIMM into Extender Board Slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Figure 4-15. Slot ID Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Figure 4-16. PCI-X OLX Divider Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Figure 4-17. Inserting PCI-X Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Figure 4-18. Removing the SCSI Jumper Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Figure 4-19. Installing the Duplex Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Figure 4-20. Installing SCSI Cable B to the SCSI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Figure 4-21. Installing SCSI Cable B to the SCSI Adapter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Figure 4-22. The MP Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Figure 4-23. The LC Command Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Figure 5-1. EFI Boot Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Figure 5-2. MP Welcome Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

9
Figures

Figure 6-1. Front Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128


Figure 6-2. QuickFind Diagnostic Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Figure 6-3. I/O Baseboard LEDs, Buttons and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Figure 6-4. Offline Diagnostic Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Figure 7-1. Accessing 25MM Torx Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Figure 7-2. Pedestal Mounted hp Integrity rx4640 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Figure 7-3. Removing and Replacing the Front Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Figure 7-4. Removing and Replacing the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Figure 7-5. Removing and Replacing the Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Figure 7-6. Battery Location on I/O Baseboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Figure 7-7. Memory Extender Board Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Figure 7-8. Memory Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Figure 7-9. 16 DIMM Extender Board Slot IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Figure 7-10. 32 DIMM Extender Board Slot IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Figure 7-11. Inserting DIMM into Extender Board Slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Figure 7-12. Processor Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Figure 7-13. Processor Cable Placed Correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Figure 7-14. Processor Cable Placed Incorrectly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Figure 7-15. Installing Processor on Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Figure 7-16. Hot-Swap I/O Chassis Fans Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Figure 7-17. Hot-Swap Power Supply Chassis Fan Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Figure 7-18. I/O Board Locking Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Figure 7-19. I/O Baseboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Figure 7-20. I/O Baseboard Select Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Figure 7-21. Slot ID Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Figure 7-22. PCI-X OLX Divider Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Figure 7-23. Inserting PCI-X Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Figure 7-24. OLX Divider Removal and Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Figure 7-25. OLX Divider Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Figure 7-26. VRM Board Remove and Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Figure 7-27. Disk Drive Installation in Slots 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Figure 7-28. Disk Drive Installation in Slot 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Figure 7-29. Volume Filler Installation in Slot 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Figure 7-30. SCSI Backplane Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Figure 7-31. Midplane Riser Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Figure 7-32. Hot-Swap Power Supply Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Figure 7-33. Power Distribution Board Removal and Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Figure 7-34. DVD Drive Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Figure 7-35. DVD I/O Board Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Figure 7-36. Display Board Removal and Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Figure 7-37. QuickFind Diagnostic Board Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221

10
1 About This Document

This document describes how to operate and maintain your hp Integrity rx4640 Server, Regulatory Model Number:
RSVLA-0201.
The document printing date and part number indicate the document’s current edition. The printing date will change when a
new edition is printed. Minor changes may be made at reprint without changing the printing date. The document part number
will change when extensive changes are made.
Document updates may be issued between editions to correct errors or document product changes. To ensure that you receive
the updated or new editions, you should subscribe to the appropriate product support service. See your HP sales representative
for details.

IMPORTANT The latest version of this document can be found online at http://docs.hp.com.

What’s in This Document


The hp Integrity rx4640 Operation and Maintenance Guide contains these chapters:

• Chapter 2, “Controls, Ports, and Indicators.” Use this chapter to learn about the front panel controls, rear panel ports
and connectors, and all system LED locations and functions.
• Chapter 3, “External Connectors.” Use this chapter to learn about all external connectors, plugs, and their pinouts.
• Chapter 4, “Installing Additional Components and Configuring.” Use this chapter to learn how to install additional
hot-swap power supplies, hot-swap disk drives, memory DIMMs, processors, and PCI-X cards. Also, learn how to
configure your management processor and boot your HP Server.
• Chapter 5, “Utilities.” Use this chapter to learn how to navigate in the EFI and management processor environments.
• Chapter 6, “Troubleshooting.” Use this chapter to learn how to perform minimal troubleshooting of your system
• Chapter 7, “Removing and Replacing Components.” Use this chapter to learn how to remove and replace all Field
Replaceable Units (FRUs) in your system.
• Chapter 8, “Parts Information.” Use this chapter to see a list of all FRUs.
• Chapter 9, “Specifications.” Use this chapter to learn the basic mechanical specifications of your HP Server.

Typographical Conventions
This document uses the following conventions.
Title The title of a document or a CD.
KeyCap The name of a keyboard key. Note that Return and Enter both refer to the same key.
Emphasis Text that is emphasized.
Bold Text that is strongly emphasized, such as the summary text in bulleted paragraphs.
ComputerOut Text displayed by the computer.
UserInput Commands and other text that you type.
Command A command name or qualified command phrase.

Chapter 1 11
About This Document
Related Documents

Related Documents
The HP Server Documentation CD-ROM has been provided with your server. It contains a complete documentation set for the
server, including localized versions of key documents. Included on the CD-ROM are the Site Preparation and Operations and
Maintenance guides, which contain in-depth troubleshooting, installation, and repair information.
The CD will autorun when you insert it into a Windows workstation, or, point your browser at the index.htm file located under
the Start directory of the CD. All users, including UNIX/Linux, can access a complete manual set by viewing the directory
manuals. The manuals are in Adobe Acrobat Reader (pdf) format.

IMPORTANT The latest version of this document can be found online at http://docs.hp.com.

HP Encourages Your Comments


HP encourages your comments concerning this document. We are truly committed to providing documentation that meets your
needs.
Please send any comments by contacting us at http://docs.hp.com/assistance/index.html.
Please include document title, manufacturing part number, and any comment, error found, or suggestion for improvement you
have concerning this document.

Where to Get Help


For online access to technical support information, self-solve tools, online assistance, community forums of IT experts, broad
multivendor knowledge base, and monitoring and diagnostic tools, go to http://www.hp.com/support.
For the latest information on HP-UX patches, check the HP IT Resource Center at http://itrc.hp.com.

Information to Collect Before You Contact Support


Before you contact HP support, you should:

Step 1. Check information on troubleshooting and attempt to solve the problem. See Chapter 6, “Troubleshooting.”

• Note failure symptoms and error indications (LEDs and messages) by checking the SEL and FPL logs.

• Try to determine precisely what did or did not happen.

Step 2. Collect the following information:

• The model number of your server (for example, rx4640).

• The product number of your server. This can be found on the identification label, which is found at the front of
the unit (typically A6837B A6838B, and so on).

12 Chapter 1
About This Document
Where to Get Help

• The serial number of your server. This can be found on the identification label.

Step 3. Become familiar with your system configuration:

• Are you using the LAN, RS232, or web interface to monitor the server?

• How many processors, DIMMs, and PCI cards have been installed?

• What versions of processor, memory, and PCI cards are used and where are they installed?

• What accessories are installed?

Step 4. Determine the following:

• Which firmware versions are in use?

• When did the problem start?

• Have recent changes been made to the system?

• Which operating system and version is in use?

Chapter 1 13
About This Document
Where to Get Help

14 Chapter 1
2 Controls, Ports, and Indicators

Introduction
This chapter describes the controls, ports, and indicators found on the front panel, rear panel, and internal locations of the hp
Integrity rx4640 Server. The hp Integrity rx4640 Server comes in either rack mount or pedestal configurations.

Chapter 2 15
Controls, Ports, and Indicators
Front Panel

Front Panel
The front panel of the hp Integrity rx4640 Server provide the controls and indicators commonly used for operation.

Figure 2-1 Front View with Bezel

Control Panel

Figure 2-2 Accessing the Control Panel

16 Chapter 2
Controls, Ports, and Indicators
Front Panel

Figure 2-3 Control Panel

System LED
Power LED
Power Button Disk LED
TOC/NMI Button
Thermal LED

Locator
Button/LED

Table 2-1 Control Panel LED Definitions

LED/
State Flash Rate Color Description
Button

System Running Steady Green Green: System normal—OS up and running

System Booting Flashing at Green Flashing Green: OS booting or at EFI


0.5Hz

System Attention Flashing at 1 Yellow Flashing Yellow: Warning-system needs attention.


Hz Redundancy lost, component failure pending.

System Fault Flashing at 2 Red Flashing Red: Hard fault. system halted
Hz

System Off Off N/A Off: System off

Power On Steady Green Green: Power normal

Power On Steady Yellow Flashing Yellow: Housekeeping voltage present

Power Off Off Off Off: Power off

Disk LED Flashing at Green Flashing Green: Disk activity


rate of disk
activity

Thermal LED OK Steady Green Green: Thermal OK

Thermal LED Warning Flashing at 1 Yellow Flashing Yellow: Thermal warning


Hz

Locator Flashing at 1 Blue Flashing Blue: System locator LED may be


LED/Button Hz remotely or locally activated/deactivated

Chapter 2 17
Controls, Ports, and Indicators
Additional Controls and Indicators

Switch/Button and Front Control Panel LED Definitions


Table 2-2 Switch/Button LED Definitions

Button/Switch Description

Power Button The power switch turns the HP Server power on or off. If sleep states are available, it
also transitions between power-on and sleep states.
Sleep states are NOS dependent and only available if your NOS supports power
management based on the ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface)
standard.

NMI Button Press the nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) switch before restarting the system after a hung
(Paper clip may be used to condition occurs. NMI provides crash dump capture capability. Obtain a system
depress button.) hardware status dump to use in root cause analysis and debugging.

Additional Controls and Indicators


Storage devices have additional LEDs showing their status.

Hot-Plug Disk Drive Indicators


The hot-swap disk drives have two LEDs per drive, as described below.

• Drive Status LED - The drive status LED is tri-color and may display green, amber, or yellow at any given time. These
colors indicate a normal, warning, or failure condition.
• Drive Activity LED - The drive activity LED is green and indicates disk drive activity. This LED is controlled by the disk
drive directly and turns on when a drive is accessed.

Figure 2-4 Hot-Swap Disk Drive LED Indicators

Status LED

Activity LED

Table 2-3 Hot-Swap Disk Drive LED Definitions

LED Description

Activity LED Flashing green Drive access under hard drive control.

18 Chapter 2
Controls, Ports, and Indicators
Additional Controls and Indicators

Table 2-3 Hot-Swap Disk Drive LED Definitions (Continued)

LED Description

Status LED Solid Amber Drive fault.

Amber Missing management board or jumper cable. For all HDD on SCSI bus A
and/or B.

Green Drive/Slot normal (drive present).

Blank Pass through mode.

DVD–ROM/DVD-R/DVD-RW Drives
The HP Server is delivered with one DVD-ROM drive (DVD-R and DVD-RW optional). Each of these devices has one
activity LED.

Figure 2-5 DVD–ROM Drive

Eject Button Activity LED Emergency Eject

Table 2-4 DVD Drive LED Definitions

LED Description

Activity LED Flashing green Drive access under hard drive control.

QuickFind Diagnostic Panel


The QuickFind diagnostic panel has 27 single color LEDs and one multi-color LED for temperature. The LEDs are normally
off. The appropriate LED is turned on when an error is detected or a replacement part is required.

Chapter 2 19
Controls, Ports, and Indicators
Additional Controls and Indicators

Accessing the QuickFind Diagnostic Panel


You can access the QuickFind diagnostic panel by removing the top cover. See “Removing the Top Cover” on page 147. You
can use the QuickFind diagnostic panel as an aid in troubleshooting. For a complete description of QuickFind diagnostic LED
states, see “QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LED Definitions” on page 130.

Figure 2-6 QuickFind Diagnostic Panel

Table 2-5 QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LEDs

Item LED 0 LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 Details

Processor Socket 0 Socket 1 Socket 2 Socket3 If the System LED (on front panel) is in the
attention or fault state and the processor LED is
lit, then the processor or voltage regulator has
failed—the processor module in the specified
socket needs to be replaced.

If the thermal LED is in the warning or critical


state and the processor LED is lit, then the
processor exceeded the warning or critical level.

Subsystem CPU board Memory I/O board n/a A soldered voltage regulator has failed—the
board specified board must be replaced.

20 Chapter 2
Controls, Ports, and Indicators
Additional Controls and Indicators

Table 2-5 QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LEDs (Continued)

Item LED 0 LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 Details

I/O VRM 12 volt 5 volt 3 volt n/a A plug-in voltage regulator has failed—specific
VRM must be replaced.

CPU VRM n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Fan Module 0 1 2 n/a One or both fans in a fan module has failed—the
module must be replaced.

Fan 2 is in front of the power supplies.

Memory DIMM xA DIMM DIMM xC DIMM The specified DIMM has failed—the DIMM
Bank X (0-7) xB xD must be replaced.

If all the LEDs for a rank (0-7) are lit and the
Memory Config Error LED is lit then the
DIMMs in the specified rank are
mismatched—replace mismatched DIMM.

Check Power n/a n/a n/a One of the power supply or power supply fans
Supply has failed—replace the power supply. The faulty
power supply LED (located on power supply)
will be lit.

Memory n/a n/a n/a The DIMMs in a rank are mismatched. All the
Config Error DIMMs in the specified rank (0-7) will be lit.

Processor n/a n/a n/a The processors are mismatched—replace


Config Error mismatched processor.

Missing n/a n/a n/a A required component(s) is not installed in the


Component system and thus preventing power up.

System Temp n/a n/a n/a The internal temperature of the server has
exceeded the warning or critical level.

Check Event n/a n/a n/a An event has occurred that requires attention.
Log

Chapter 2 21
Controls, Ports, and Indicators
Additional Controls and Indicators

I/O Baseboard LED Indicators


Various LEDs, sensors, reset, and attention buttons are found on the I/O baseboard.

Figure 2-7 I/O Baseboard LEDs, Buttons, and Sensors

Battery

3.3VSB
Power
LED
BMC
Reset
Button

12V VRM LED

PCI Attention
LED
6X

PCI Attention
Button (Doorbell)
5V VRM 6X
LED
PCI Power LED
MP Soft 6X
Reset
Button MP Heartbeat LED 3.3V VRM LED PCI Attention LED
MP Self-Test BMC Heartbeat LED Locator Button/LED 6X
LED

Table 2-6 I/O Baseboard LEDs, Buttons, and Sensors

LED/Button Color Status Condition

12V VRM Power Green On 12V VRM is functioning.


LED

5V VRM Power Green On 5V VRM is functioning.


LED

22 Chapter 2
Controls, Ports, and Indicators
Rear Panel

Table 2-6 I/O Baseboard LEDs, Buttons, and Sensors (Continued)

LED/Button Color Status Condition

3.3V VRM Power Green On 3.3V VRM is functioning.


LED

MP Heartbeat Green Blinking The management processor is functioning correctly.

MP Self Test LED Amber On The management processor is executing the internal self test.

Off The management processor has passed the internal self test.

BMC Heartbeat Green Blinking The baseboard management controller is functioning correctly.

3.3VSB Power Green On Standby power is available.


LED

MP Soft Reset N/A Press Resets the management processor values.


Button

Rear Panel
The HP Server rear panel includes communication ports, I/O ports, AC power connectors, two power supply bays, attention
LED indicators for the hot-plug PCI boards, and the locator LED/button. LEDs located on the rear panel of the HP Server
signal the operational status of:

• Power supplies
• Management processor LAN
• 2 Port Gigabit Ethernet card LAN

Chapter 2 23
Controls, Ports, and Indicators
Rear Panel

• PCI slots 3-8

Figure 2-8 Rack Mount and Pedestal Rear View


Gigabit Ethernet LAN LEDs

MP LAN LEDs 6 PCI Attention LEDs


Locator Button/LED

24 Chapter 2
Controls, Ports, and Indicators
Rear Panel

Power Supply Status LEDs


Each 200-240 VAC power supply unit has three status LEDs located on the power supply rear side. Consolidated status of all
power supplies is reported by the front control panel by the power status LED.

Figure 2-9 Power Supply Status LED

Predict Fail Power LED-Green


LED-Amber
Fail LED-Amber

Table 2-7 Power Supply Status LED

Power Predict Fail Fail


Status
LED-Green LED-Amber LED-Amber

Off Off Off No AC power applied to all PSUs.

Off Off On No AC power applied to this PSU only.

Blinking Off Off AC present/standby outputs on.

On Off Off PSU DC outputs on and OK.

Off Off On Power supply failure.

On Blinking Off Predictive failure—PSU about to fail because of poorly performing


fan.

On Off Blinking Current limit on 48 VDC output.

Chapter 2 25
Controls, Ports, and Indicators
Rear Panel

Management Processor LAN LEDs


The internal management processor (MP) LAN uses an RJ-45 type connector. This connector has two LEDs (LAN link and
LAN activity) that signal status and activity.

Figure 2-10 MP LAN LEDs

10M Link/Activity, Amber LED 100M Link/Activity, Green LED

USB Ports
Locator Button and LED

Table 2-8 MP LED Status Descriptions

LED Condition Status

10M amber On Linked at 10MBps—no


activity

10M amber Blinking Linked at


10MBps—activity present

100M green On Linked at 100MBps—no


activity

100M green Blinking Linked at


100MBps—activity
present

Locator LED and Button


An LED and button is provided on the rear panel of the server. Another single blue LED and button is on the front control
panel that enables/disables the locator function. See Figure 2-10, “MP LAN LEDs.”

26 Chapter 2
Controls, Ports, and Indicators
Rear Panel

Gigabit Ethernet Card LAN LEDs

(Core I/O)
The 2-Port core I/O Gigabit Ethernet card uses an RJ-45 LAN connector. This connector has 4 LEDs (3 LAN link and 1 LAN
activity) that signal link speed and activity.

Figure 2-11 Core I/O LAN Port LEDs

RJ-45 Connector

1000 Activity
100 10

Table 2-9 Core LED Status Descriptions

LED Condition Status

Activity Green—on Linked—no activity

Activity Green—off No link

Activity Green—blinking Linked—activity present

1000 Green—on Link speed—1000 MBps

100 Green—on Link speed—100 MBps

10 Green—on Link speed—10 MBps

Chapter 2 27
Controls, Ports, and Indicators
Rear Panel

28 Chapter 2
3 External Connectors

Connector Pinouts
The following ports and connectors are found on the rear panel of the hp Integrity rx4640 Server. The SCSI Host Bus Adapter
card in slot 1 and the Gigabit Ethernet card in slot 2 are factory installed.

Figure 3-1 Rear View

HBA, Ultra 3 SCSI, 68 Pin Gigabit Ethernet LAN Port

Local Ax Remote

3 Serial Ports VGA Port Management Processor


LAN Port
USB Ports

Universal Serial Bus (USB) Ports

Figure 3-2 USB Port Connector

1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4

Table 3-1 USB Pinouts

Pin Number Signal Description

1 +5VDC

2 MR

Chapter 3 29
External Connectors
Connector Pinouts

Table 3-1 USB Pinouts (Continued)

Pin Number Signal Description

3 PR

4 Ground

VGA Port

Figure 3-3 Video Port Connector

Table 3-2 Video Connector Pinouts

Pin Number Signal Description Pin Number Signal Description

1 Red 9 +5VDC

2 Green 10 Sync return (ground)

3 Blue 11 Not used

4 Not used 12 Monitor ID bit 1

5 Video Self Test (ground) 13 Horizontal sync (+)

6 Red return (ground) 14 Vertical sync (-)

7 Green return (ground) 15 Video ID bit 2

8 Blue return (ground)

30 Chapter 3
External Connectors
Connector Pinouts

Serial Ports

Figure 3-4 Serial Port Connector


5 9
4 8
3
2 7
1 6

Table 3-3 Serial Port Pinouts

Pin Number Signal Description

1 Data carrier detect

2 Receive data

3 Transmit data

4 Data Term ready

5 Ground

6 Data set ready

7 Request to send

8 Clear to send

9 Ring indicator

Management Processor LAN Port

Figure 3-5 Management Processor Port

Green Yellow

1 8

Table 3-4 Management Processor LAN Port Pinouts

Pin Number Signal Description

1 TXP

2 TXN

3 RXP

Chapter 3 31
External Connectors
Connector Pinouts

Table 3-4 Management Processor LAN Port Pinouts (Continued)

Pin Number Signal Description

4 Not used

5 Not used

6 RXN

7 Not used

8 Not used

Additional Ports on Accessory Boards

Gigabit Ethernet (LAN) Port

Figure 3-6 LAN Port

1 8

Table 3-5 LAN Port Pinouts

Pin Number Signal Description

1 RXP

2 RXN

3 TXP

4 Not used

5 Not used

6 TXN

7 Not used

8 Not used

32 Chapter 3
External Connectors
Connector Pinouts

SCSI Port, Ultra 3, 68-Pin


Two Ultra 3, 68-pin SCSI connectors are located on the host bus adapter (HBA) located in PCI slot 1. The upper connector
supports SCSI channel A and the lower connector supports SCSI channel B.

Figure 3-7 SCSI Port, Ultra 3, 68-Pin

35 68

1 34

Table 3-6 SCSI Port Pinouts

Pin Number Signal Description Pin Number Signal Description

1 S1 (+DB 12) 35 S35 (-DB 12)

2 S2 (+DB 13) 36 S36 (-DB 13)

3 S3 (+DB 14) 37 S37 (-DB 14)

4 S4 (+DB 15) 38 S38 (-DB 15)

5 S5 (+DB P1) 39 S39 (-DB P1)

6 S6 (+DB 0) 40 S40 (-DB 0)

7 S7 (+DB 1) 41 S41 (-DB 1)

8 S8 (+DB 2) 42 S42 (-DB 2)

9 S9 (DB 3) 43 S43 (-DB 3)

10 S10 (+DB 4) 44 S44 (-DB 4)

11 S11 (+DB5) 45 S45 (-DB 5)

12 S12 (+DB 6) 46 S46 (-DB 6)

13 S13 (+DB 7) 47 S47 (-DB 7)

14 S14 (+DB P) 48 S48 (-DB P)

15 S15 49 S49

16 S16 (DIFFSENS) 50 S50

17 S17 (TERMPWR) 51 S51 (TERMPWR)

18 S18 (TERMPWR) 52 S52 (TERMPWR)

19 S19 (RESERVED) 53 S53 (RESERVED)

20 S20 54 S54

Chapter 3 33
External Connectors
Connector Pinouts

Table 3-6 SCSI Port Pinouts (Continued)

Pin Number Signal Description Pin Number Signal Description

21 S21 (+ATN) 55 S55 (-ATN)

22 S22 56 S56

23 S23 (+BSY) 57 S57 (-BSY)

24 S24 (+ACK) 58 S58 (-ACK)

25 S25 (+RST) 59 S59 (-RST)

26 S26 (+MSG) 60 S60 (-MSG)

27 S27 (+SEL) 61 S61 (-SEL)

28 S28 (+C/D) 62 S62 (-C/D)

29 S29 (+REQ) 63 S63 (-REQ)

30 S30 (+I/O) 64 S64 (-I/O)

31 S31 (+DB 8) 65 S65 (-DB 8)

32 S32 (+DB 9) 66 S66 (-DB 9)

33 S33 (DB 10) 67 S67 (-DB 10)

34 S34 (DB 11) 68 S68 (-DB 11)

34 Chapter 3
4 Installing Additional Components and Configuring

Installing Power Supplies and Disk Drives


This section provides information about installing hot-swap power supplies and hot-plug disk drives. Hot- swap power
supplies are located at the rear of the hp Integrity rx4640 Server and hot-plug disk drives are located behind the front bezel.

CAUTION A hot-plug device may require interaction with the operating system before the device can be safely installed
into the server. Verify that the operating system supports installing disk drives while the operating system is
running. If the operating system does not support this feature, shut down the operating system before
attempting this procedure. Failure to observe this caution will result in system failure.

NOTE A hot-swap device does not require interaction with the operating system before the device is removed from
or installed into the server.
The AC power to the server does not have to be off to install a hot-swap power supply.

Figure 4-1 Front View

Slot 2

Slot 1

DVD Drive Control Panel

Installing Hot-Swap Power Supply Units (PSU)

Power Supply Load Order


The supported configuration of an hp Integrity rx4640 Server requires a minimum of one 200-240 VAC power supply unit to
be installed. A second, optional hot-swap PSU, may be installed to provide N+1 capability.
The left side (viewing from the rear) hot-swap PSU is identified as P 0, and the second hot-swap power supply is identified as
P 1. Each hot-swap PSU requires a separate power cord, installed in the appropriate power cord receptacle.

CAUTION The empty hot-swap PSU slot P 1 must remain closed, with the supplied metal cover, when a second power
supply is not used. Your server may be damaged due to overheating if the cover does not remain in place.

Chapter 4 35
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Installing Power Supplies and Disk Drives

WARNING Be careful when installing a hot-swap power supply. It is heavier than it appears.

CAUTION If the system is powered down, install the hot-swap PSU into the server before attaching the new power cord
at the rear of the system. Failure to observe this caution will result in damage to the server.

To install a hot-swap power supply, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the metal cover from slot P 1. Grasp the metal cover and pull straight out.

Step 3. Supporting the PSU with both hands, slide it into slot P 1 until it plugs into the socket on the internal power supply
board. Tighten thumbscrew hand-tight.

Step 4. Install the power cord into the PSU socket and secure it to the power cord bracket.

Step 5. Apply power to the new PSU; the LED should immediately turn on.

36 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Installing Power Supplies and Disk Drives

Step 6. If rack mounted, slide the HP server back into the rack until it stops.

Figure 4-2 Hot-Swap Power Supply in P 0 Slot

Chapter 4 37
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Installing Power Supplies and Disk Drives

Figure 4-3 Metal Cover in Unused P 1 Slot

Installing Hot-Plug Disk Drives


One additional hot-plug disk drive may be added to your hp Integrity rx4640 Server in slot 2. Always use low profile disk
drives (1.0" height) in your HP Server.
To install a hot-plug disk drive, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Slide the hot-plug hard disk into slot 1 until it is seated.

Step 2. Close the drive-ejector handle by pushing it down until it clicks.

38 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Installing Power Supplies and Disk Drives

The hot-plug disk drive is now correctly installed.

Figure 4-4 Disk Drive Installation in Slots 1 and 2

Slot 2-SCSI ID 1

Slot 1-SCSI ID 0

Figure 4-5 Disk Drive Installation in Slot 2

Chapter 4 39
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Installing Processors and Memory

Figure 4-6 Volume Filler Installation in Slot 2

Installing Processors and Memory


This section provides information about installing processors and memory. The processors and memory extender boards are
located under the front cover.

WARNING Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected.
This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position.
Ensure that the system is powered down and all power sources have been disconnected from the server
prior to attempting the following procedures.
Failure to observe this warning could result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety
precautions could result in damage to the server.

Installing Processors

CAUTION Ensure that the cache size is identical for all processors. Failure to observe this caution will result in system
failure.

40 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Installing Processors and Memory

Ensure that all processors are rated for use at the same speed. Failure to observe this caution will result in
performance degradation.

NOTE Additional CPUs come with a CPU installation wrench shown in Figure 4-11. Use the wrench to install CPUs.

Processor Load Order


Processor modules are attached to the processor extender board, which is located under the top cover in the top service bay
directly under the memory extender board. The processor extender board can hold between one and four processor modules.
CPU 0 and CPU 1 are located on the top of the processor extender board and CPU 2 and CPU 3 are located on the bottom.
Processor modules must be installed in a specific order. The processor installation order is shown in Table 3-1.
Table 4-1 Processor Load Order

Processor
Socket
Module

First CPU 0

Second CPU 1

Third CPU 2

Fourth CPU 3

Chapter 4 41
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Installing Processors and Memory

CAUTION Do not modify the settings of the DIP switches located on the processor extender board. These switches are
for factory use. Failure to observe this caution will result in system failure.

Figure 4-7 Removing the Processor Extender Board

CPU 1

CPU 0

CPU 3 (under)
CPU 2 (under)

Installing a Processor on the Extender Board


To install a processor on the extender board, perform the following steps:
Prior to installing a processor into your system, read the following instructions carefully and refer to Figure 4-11, Installing
Processor on Extender Board Example, for a complete understanding of this process.

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the front bezel. See “Front Bezel” on page 144.

Step 3. Remove the front cover. See “Removing the Front Cover” on page 145.

Step 4. Press the latch on each extraction lever located on each side of the processor extender board.

Step 5. Pull out on the extraction levers to unplug the processor extender board from the socket located on the midplane
riser board and pull the extender board straight out, Figure 4-8.

42 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Installing Processors and Memory

Figure 4-8 Removing Processor Extender Board

CPU 1

CPU 0

CPU 3 (under)
CPU 2 (under)

Step 6. Using an antistatic wrist strap place the extender board ona grounding mat (Electrically Conductive Field Service
Grounding Kit-HP 9300-1155).

Step 7. Ensure the cam on the processor socket lock is in the unlocked, counterclockwise position.

Step 8. Carefully lower the processor, without the sequencer clamp, onto the processor socket. Align the pins on the
bottom of the heatsink to the slots in the retention frame on the extender board as shown in Figure 4-11, “Installing
Processor on Extender Board Example.”

CAUTION Test the alignment of the assembly to the socket by gently moving the assembly back and forth
with the palm of your hand—you should feel little or no sideplay. However, because the assembly
is not yet tightened, it may tilt slightly towards the center of the extender board—this is
acceptable.

Chapter 4 43
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Installing Processors and Memory

CAUTION Before locking the processor assembly into its socket, ensure that the power cable is not pinched
between the heatsink and sheetmetal frame of the extender board. Also, ensure that the two power
supply cable ends attached to the CPU assembly do not come unplugged from their sockets when
you move the cable into place under the heatsink. See Figure 4-9, “Processor Cable Placed
Correctly,” and Figure 4-10, “Processor Cable Placed Incorrectly.”

Figure 4-9 Processor Cable Placed Correctly

Heatsink
Cable is placed correctly
and is under the heatsink
Protective plastic sleeve

Sheetmetal frame

Figure 4-10 Processor Cable Placed Incorrectly

Heatsink
Cable is placed
incorrectly and is
pinched between the
heatsink and the
extender board frame
Protective plastic sleeve

Sheetmetal frame

Step 9. Lock the assembly to the socket by rotating the cam on the socket 180 degrees clockwise, using a 2.5 mm driver
(Allen wrench).

44 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Installing Processors and Memory

CAUTION When rotating the locking cam, hold the palm of your hand on top of the assembly and exert light
pressure. This ensures that the assembly stays flush and level to the socket while it is being
tightened.

Step 10. Plug in the processor cable to its socket on the extender board.

Step 11. Place the sequencer frame over the processor.

Step 12. Using the supplied torx T15 driver, tighten the 6, T15 shoulder screws until they just bottom out. Follow the
tightening sequence shown in Figure 4-11, “Installing Processor on Extender Board Example.”

CAUTION Do not overtighten the 6 shoulder screws—they may shear off if overtightened. Stop tightening
the shoulder screws when you feel them just bottom out.

Step 13. Replace the extender board into the chassis.

Step 14. Replace the front cover.

Step 15. Replace the front bezel.

Chapter 4 45
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Installing Processors and Memory

Step 16. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server into the rack until it stops.

Figure 4-11 Installing Processor on Extender Board Example


Tightening sequence for 6-shoulder
screws:
AB371A or AB372A: 1,2,3,4,5,6
AB373A: 3,4,1,2,5,6
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN!
2

4 3 Sequencer

5
1
6 Torx-T15

Shoulder Use supplied


screws wrench for
tightening shoulder
screws

2.5MM Allen

Power cable protected by


plastic sleeve

Align pins on
heatsink with
slots in frame

Slots*

Slots*

*Slots shown are


atCPU socket #1 for
clarity
Processor shown is
being mounted on
socket #0 per CPU
load order

46 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Installing Processors and Memory

Installing Memory
Your hp Integrity rx4640 Server comes with a sixteen DIMM memory extender board that is minimally configured with 1GB
of memory (four 256Mb DIMMs loaded in quad 0-(slots 0A, 0B, 0C, and 0D). See Figure 4-12, “16 DIMM Extender Board
Minimum Configuration.”
An optional thirty-two DIMM memory extender board is available to replace the sixteen DIMM memory extender board and
must also be minimally configured with 1GB in quad 0. See Figure 4-13, “32 DIMM Extender Board Minimum
Configuration.”
You may insert additional DIMMs into both sixteen and thirty-two DIMM boards. When adding DIMMs, you must use a
minimum of four like-sized DIMMs in the next available quad.

Supported DIMM Sizes


Supported DIMM sizes are 256MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GB. Dissimilar DIMM sizes may be used across the entire extender board
but all four DIMMs in each quad must match. For cooling purposes, DIMM fillers must be used in unused slots.

DIMM Slot Fillers


Both the sixteen and thirty-two DIMM extender boards have DIMM slot filler boards placed over all unfilled DIMM slots. As
you fill DIMM quads with additional memory you must remove the DIMM slot fillers covering the affected slots. All
remaining DIMM fillers in unused slots must remain in place to maximize internal cooling. See Table 4-2 on page 48 and
Table 4-3 on page 48.

Chapter 4 47
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Installing Processors and Memory

NOTE One DIMM filler board covers two adjacent DIMM slots. As a general rule, only remove DIMM slot fillers as
you add memory and you will always retain the correct configuration.

Table 4-2 DIMM Filler Requirements for 16 DIMM Extender Board

16 DIMM Extender Board

DIMMs Loaded Fillers Requireda

4 DIMMs in quad 0 6 fillers total:

2 fillers in quads 1, 2, and 3

(All quads filled)

8 DIMMs in quads 0 and 1 4 fillers total:

2 fillers in quads 2 and 3

(All quads filled)

12 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, and 2 2 fillers total:

2 fillers in quads 3

(All quads filled)

16 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, and 3 No fillers required

a. One DIMM filler board covers two adjacent DIMM slots.

Table 4-3 DIMM Filler Requirements for 32 DIMM Extender Board

32 DIMM Extender Board

DIMMs Loaded Fillers requireda

4 DIMMs in quad 0 12 fillers total:

2 fillers in quads 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7

(quad 2 remains unfilled)

8 DIMMs in quads 0 and 1 8 fillers total:

2 fillers in quads 4, 5, 6, and 7

(quads 2 and 3 remain unfilled)

12 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, and 2 8 fillers total:

2 fillers in quads 4, 5, 6, and 7

(quad 3 remains unfilled)

48 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Installing Processors and Memory

Table 4-3 DIMM Filler Requirements for 32 DIMM Extender Board (Continued)

32 DIMM Extender Board

16 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, and 3 8 fillers total:

2 fillers in quads 4, 5, 6, and 7

(All quads filled)

20 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 4 fillers total:

2 fillers in quads 5, 7

quad 6 remains unfilled

24 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 No fillers required

28 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 No fillers required

32 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 No fillers required

a. One DIMM filler board covers two DIMM adjacent slots.

Chapter 4 49
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Installing Processors and Memory

Figure 4-12 16 DIMM Extender Board Minimum Configuration

DIMM Filler

Figure 4-13 32 DIMM Extender Board Minimum Configuration

DIMM Filler

50 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Installing Processors and Memory

Removing a Memory Extender Board


To remove a memory extender board, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the front bezel from the chassis. See “Front Bezel” on page 144.

Step 3. Remove the front cover from the chassis. See “Removing the Front Cover” on page 145.

Step 4. Press each latch on the two extraction levers located on each side of the memory extender board.

Step 5. Pull on the extraction levers to unplug the memory extender board from the socket located on the midplane riser
board and remove the memory extender board from the chassis.

Installing DIMMs
To install DIMMs, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Align the DIMM with the socket located on the memory extender board.

Step 2. Gently and evenly push on each side of the DIMM until it seats in the socket. Ensure that the extraction levers are
in the closed position.

Step 3. Replace the front and top covers.

Step 4. Replace the front bezel.

Chapter 4 51
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Installing Processors and Memory

Step 5. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server into the rack until it stops.

Figure 4-14 Inserting DIMM into Extender Board Slot

Replacing a Memory Extender Board


To replace the memory extender board, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Ensure the extraction levers are positioned in the outward, unlocked position.

Step 2. Align the memory extender board with the left and right chassis guide slots.

Step 3. Slide the memory extender board in until it begins to seat in the socket located on the midplane riser board.

Step 4. Push the extraction levers inward to the locked position in order to fully plug in the memory extender board into
the midplane riser board.

Step 5. Replace the front cover onto the chassis.

Step 6. Replace the front bezel onto the chassis.

Step 7. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server into the rack until it stops.

52 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Hot-Plug PCI-X

Hot-Plug PCI-X
The hp Integrity rx4640 Server supports PCI-X hot-plug technology and offers 6 PCI-X, hot-plug capable slots.

Hot-Plug PCI-X Operations


PCI-X hot-plug technology enables the following hot-plug operations. For procedures with step-by-step instructions
describing how to add, replace, delete, and locate PCI-X cards see “Hot-Plug Operation Procedures” on page 58.

• Online Addition (OL-A)


You can install new PCI-X expansion cards in previously empty slots without powering down the server.
• Online Replacement (OL-R)
You can replace a previously occupied slot with a new PCI-X expansion card by suspending the driver. This operation
combines removing an active card and replacing it with an equivalent capability card. The existing driver for the old card
must be compatible with the new card.

CAUTION A special OL-R requirement for HP-UX 11i v2 is that the card to be inserted (replaced) must be exactly
the same as the removed card. This is also known as like-for-like replacement.

NOTE Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition does not support OL-R. Instead, you can perform a combination
of an OL-D operation followed by an OL-A operation. This is the equivalent of an OL-R operation.

• Online Deletion (OL-D)


You can remove an existing PCI-X expansion card. This operation is different from OL-R because there are no restrictions
placed on the type of replacement card that you can use. In this operation, the drivers are also completely removed from
the slot.

NOTE HP-UX 11i v2 does not support OL-D. It does support OL-R.

• PCI-X Slot Locate (Locate)


To easily locate the PCI-X slot at which you wish to perform a hot-plug operation, you can command the attention LEDs,
on the OLX divider and the I/O baseboard, to blink and act as visual cues to the active slot location. This operation is
always initiated via a software or web interface, and is optional to the operating system on your HP Server.

Operating System Support for Hot-Plug PCI-X Operations


The capability of each operating system to support hot-plug PCI-X operations is different. The following explanation details
the capabilities of each operation system.

• HP-UX 11i v2
HP-UX 11i v2 supports only OL-A, OL-R, and Locate hot-plug PCI-X operations.
In OL-R, it is a requirement that the card to be inserted (replaced) be exactly the same as the card being removed. During
this OL-R operation, HP-UX 11i v2 suspends the device driver and re-enables it upon completion of the OL-R operation.
In HP-UX 11i v2, the Locate function is only available via the command line or web interface.

Chapter 4 53
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Hot-Plug PCI-X

• Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition


Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition supports only OL-A and OL-D hot-plug PCI-X operations.
In OL-D, Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition will delete the device object after the card’s successful removal from
the slot. You do not have to re-install drivers for the deleted device on subsequent insertions or reboots.
To perform a card replacement hot-plug PCI-X operation in Windows Server 2003, you must first perform an OL-D
operation followed by an OL-A operation.
• Linux Red Hat Advanced Server 2.1
At this time Linux Red Hat Advanced Server 2.1 does not support hot-plug PCI-X technology. Future releases will
support hot-plug PCI-X technology.
The following table shows hot-plug operations that are available in HP-UX 11i v2, Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition,
and Linux Red Hat Advanced Server 2.1 operating systems.
Table 4-4 Hot-Plug Operation and OS Compatibility

Linux Red Hat


Hot-Plug Windows Server 2003
HP-UX 11i v2 Advanced Server
Operation Enterprise Edition
2.1

OL-A Yes Yes No

OL-R Yes. HP-UX 11i v2 demands like-for-like No. But, you can perform a No
replacement. A like-for-like card means that combination of OL-D and OL-A
the new card is exactly the same as the card to replace a card.
being replaced.

OL-D Not supported by HP-UX 11i v2. Yes No

Locate Yes. Only supported via the command line No No


interface or the web interface.

PCI-X Hardware and Software Interfaces


The following table shows what hot-plug hardware and software interfaces are available on HP-UX 11i v2, Windows Server
2003 Enterprise Edition, and Linux Red Hat Advanced Server 2.1 operating systems.
Table 4-5 Hot-Plug Hardware and Software Interfaces, and OS Availability

Linux Red
Windows Server 2003
Hot-Plug PCI-X Interface HP-UX 11i v2 Hat Advanced
Enterprise Edition
Server 2.1

Hardware interface comprised of: Yes Yes No


—Attention Button
—Manual Retention Latch
—Power LED
—Attention LED
—PCI-X card lock

54 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Hot-Plug PCI-X

Table 4-5 Hot-Plug Hardware and Software Interfaces, and OS Availability (Continued)

Linux Red
Windows Server 2003
Hot-Plug PCI-X Interface HP-UX 11i v2 Hat Advanced
Enterprise Edition
Server 2.1

Graphical User Interface Yes Yes. You can use the No


Safely Remove
Hardware icon in the tool
tray or device manager to
remove a device (OL-D).
OL-A is only possible via
the hardware interface.

Command Line Interface (CLI) Yes -olrad command. Read No No


Interface Card OL* Support
for HP-UX Servers and
Workstations, olrad Command
Line Interface, B2355-90804 at
http://docs.hp.com.

Web Interface Yes- pdweb command. Read No No


Interface Card OL* Support
for HP-UX Servers and
Workstations,
pdweb-Peripheral Device tool
Web Interface, B2355-90804 at
http://docs.hp.com.

PCI-X Slot Locations and Configurations


PCI-X slots are numbered from 1 through 8 in your HP Server. See Figure 4-15, “Slot ID Numbering.”
The following describes configuration requirements for slots 1 through 8:

• PCI slots 1 and 2 are dedicated for use by the core I/O cards—SCSI HBA card in slot 1 and Gigabit Ethernet LAN card in
slot 2. Slots 1 and 2 are not hot-plug capable. Additional PCI-X expansion cards may not be placed in slots 1 or 2.
• Slot 3 and 4 is the first pair of shared slots, and slot 5 and 6 is the second pair of shared slots. The maximum capability of
each of the shared slots is PCI-X 66MHz. If a PCI-X 133 MHz card is placed in a shared slot, then the maximum
capability the PCI-X 133 MHz card will run at is PCI-X 66MHz. If different modes (PCI vs. PCI-X) or slower speeds (33
MHz) are used, then the slot to be used will automatically downgrade to accept the change.
Shared slots have card compatibility restrictions. If one of the shared slots is occupied then the card being added to the
second slot is limited by the configuration of the occupied slot. If the new card has a slower capability than the current bus
configuration, it will be rejected. If the new card has a faster capability than the current bus configuration, it will only run
at the bus mode and frequency of the current bus configuration (slower).

1. If you have a 66 MHz card in slot 3, and you hot-plug insert a 33 Mhz card into slot 4, then the operation will not
succeed. The new 33 MHz card will not initialize and the slot will power down because you cannot change bus speed
during hot-plug operations.

Chapter 4 55
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Hot-Plug PCI-X

NOTE If the system is rebooted in the new configuration, then both cards will initialize to run at 33 MHz.
This is because the system firmware can only change the bus capability from 66 MHz down to 33
MHz.

2. If you have a 33 MHz card in slot 3, and you hot-plug insert a 66 Mhz card into slot 4, it will work but the new card
will run at 33 MHz. This also applies to slots 5 and 6, as they are shared (both use a common bus).
3. If your unit is powered down, and you insert a 33 MHz card into slot 4 (that shares a 66 MHz card in slot 3), then both
cards will run at 33 MHz when the unit is powered up. This also applies to slots 5 and 6, as they are shared (both use
a common bus).
• Slots 7 and 8 are single slots. The maximum capability of each slot is PCI-X 133MH. Only slots 7 and 8 will allow 133
Mhz, PCI-X cards to run at full speed. These two slots are not limited by bus-mode, frequency-related incompatibilities.
Table 4-6 PCI-X Card vs. Slot Frequency/Bus Mode Compatibility for Shared Slotsa

Current PCI Bus Cards to be installed


Mode and
Frequency for the
PCI 33 PCI 66 PCI-X 66 PCI-X 133
Shared Slot

PCI 33 MHz Compatibleb Compatible Compatible Compatible


(2nd note) (2nd note) (2nd note)
New card New card New card
running at PCI running at PCI running at PCI
33 33 33

PCI 66 MHz Incompatible-F Compatible Compatible Compatible


requencyc (2nd note) (2nd note) (2nd note)
New card New card
running at PCI running at PCI
66 66

PCI-X 66 MHz Incompatible-F Incompatible-B Compatible Compatible


requency usd (2nd note) (2nd note)
(3rd note) New card
running at
PCI-X 66

PCI-X 133 MHze Incompatible-F Incompatible-Fr Compatible Compatible


requency equency (2nd note) (2nd note)
(3rd note) (3rd note) New card New card
running at
PCI-X 66

a. NOTE: The conditions described in this table apply only to shared slots (slots 3,4-bus 2
and 5,6-bus 3). Slots 7 and 8 are not shared slots.
b. Compatible: card is accepted and runs at frequency shown.
c. Incompatible-Frequency: card is rejected. The new card will not initialized and will power
down due to frequency mismatch.
d. Incompatible-Bus: Card is rejected. The new card will not initialize and will power down
due to bus mode mismatch.
e. Maximum bus mode and frequency supported on shared slots is PCI-X 66 MHz.

56 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Hot-Plug PCI-X

CAUTION If you are using Linux Red Hat Advanced Server 2.1 operating system and you want to install a 1000b-Sx
GigE card, do not install it into a slot that shares a bus with a 33 MHz card. In this configuration the Linux
driver will not initialize the new card.

CAUTION Do not use more than 3 RAID cards in any of the slots on your hp Integrity rx4640 Server. System power
limitations restrict the use of more than 3 RAID cards per system.

Figure 4-15 Slot ID Numbering

PCI-X Bus 1
PCI-X Bus 2

PCI-X Bus 3
PCI-X Bus 4
PCI-X Bus 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Slot ID Number

Amber attention LEDs, 6x

Green power LEDs, 6x

Amber attention LEDs, 6x


Core I/O Public I/O
PCI-X PCI-X, Hot-Plug

Chapter 4 57
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Hot-Plug PCI-X

Hot-Plug Operation Procedures


The hot-plug procedures described in this section will use the hardware interface only. Software interface procedures are
described in Table 4-5 on page 55. For a complete understanding of all HP-UX hot-plug techniques and concepts, it is
recommended that you refer to Interface Card OL* Support for HP-UX Servers and Workstations, B2355-90804 at
http://docs.hp.com.

CAUTION Before adding or replacing a PCI-X card, determine if that card is critical to your system’s operation. If you
replace a card that is still operating and it is a critical resource to your system, you may cause undesired
system downtime. Read Interface Card OL* Support for HP-UX Servers and Workstations, Critical
Resources, B2355-90804, at http://docs.hp.com, prior to performing a hot-plug operation.

Online Addition-(OL-A)
Before installing a PCI-X card, ensure that the proper drivers for that PCI-X card are installed.
To add a PCI-X card into an empty slot, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the top cover from the chassis. See “Removing the Top Cover” on page 147.

Step 3. If the power LED is steady-on (power to slot is on), go to step 4. If the power LED is steady-off (power to slot is
off), go to step 5.

Step 4. To turn off power to the slot, pull up on the manual retention latch (MRL) located on the OLX divider. The power
LED goes to steady-off. See Figure 4-16 on page 60.

CAUTION Do not pull up on the MRL of a powered-on, occupied slot or your system will crash. This OL-A
procedure is for powering down a powered-on, unoccupied slot only. For a detailed procedure on
how to power down an occupied slot see “Online Replacement-(OL-R)” or “Online Deletion
(OL-D)”.

Step 5. Ensure that the MRL is already open and insert the PCI-X card to be added into the powered down slot. See
Figure 4-17, “Inserting PCI-X Card.”

CAUTION When inserting the PCI-X card, be careful you do not accidentally touch an attention button on the
other OLX dividers—this will initiate an undesired shutdown of another PCI-X card/slot.

Also, ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot or undesired results may occur after power is
re-applied to the slot.

Step 6. Push the manual retention latch down until it seats against the chassis wall.

Step 7. Turn the PCI-X card lock to the closed position to capture the PCI-X card and manual retention latch into the
closed position.

Step 8. Press the attention button and the power LED starts to blink. Wait until the power LED goes from blinking to
steady-on.

58 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Hot-Plug PCI-X

NOTE After pushing the attention button, you have 5 seconds to cancel the operation by pushing the
attention button again.

Step 9. Replace the top cover.

Chapter 4 59
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Hot-Plug PCI-X

Step 10. Push the HP Server all the way back into the rack until it stops.

Figure 4-16PCI-X OLX Divider Layout


PCI-X card latch
closed position PCI-X card latch
Manual retention open position
latch—closed Manual retention
latch—open

Power LED
light pipe
Attention button
Attention LED
light pipe

60 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Hot-Plug PCI-X

Figure 4-17 Inserting PCI-X Card

Online Deletion (OL-D)


To delete a PCI-X card from an occupied slot, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the top cover from the chassis. See “Installing Processors and Memory” on page 40.

Chapter 4 61
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Hot-Plug PCI-X

Step 3. Press the attention button located on the OLX divider that controls the affected slot—the power LED starts to
blink. Wait until the power LED goes from blinking to steady-off.

NOTE After pushing the attention button, you have 5 seconds to cancel the operation by pushing the
attention button again.

Step 4. Turn the PCI-X card lock on the chassis until the manual retention latch (MRL) is free to pull up.

Step 5. At this point, the power to the slot is off; pull up on the manual retention latch located on the OLX divider. See
Figure 4-16 on page 60.

Step 6. Remove the existing PCI-X card from the slot.

Step 7. Push the manual retention latch down until it seats against the chassis wall.

Step 8. Replace the top cover.

Step 9. Push the HP Server all the way back into the rack until it stops.

Online Replacement-(OL-R)
As discussed in the opening section, OL-R is a combination of an OL-D procedure followed by an OL-A procedure.

CAUTION For HP-UX 11i v2 only. You can only replace an existing card with a like card.

To remove and replace a PCI-X card into a populated slot, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the top cover from the chassis. See “Installing Processors and Memory” on page 40.

Step 3. Press the attention button located on the OLX divider controls the affected slot—the power LED starts to blink.
Wait until the power LED goes from blinking to steady-off.

NOTE After pushing the attention button, you have 5 seconds to cancel the operation by pushing the
attention button again.

Step 4. Turn the PCI-X card lock on the chassis until the manual retention latch (MRL) is free to pull up.

Step 5. At this point, the power to the slot is off; pull up on the manual retention latch located on the OLX divider. See
Figure 4-16, “PCI-X OLX Divider Layout.”

Step 6. Remove the existing PCI-X card from the slot.

Step 7. Insert the new PCI-X card into the powered down slot. See Figure 4-17, “Inserting PCI-X Card.”

CAUTION When inserting the PCI-X card, be careful you do not accidentally touch an attention button on the
other OLX dividers—this will initiate an undesired shutdown of another PCI-X card/slot.

Also, ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot or undesired results may occur after power is
re-applied to the slot.

62 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Hot-Plug PCI-X

Step 8. Push the manual retention latch down until it seats against the chassis wall.

Step 9. Turn the PCI-X card lock on the chassis to the closed position. This locks the PCI-X card into its slot and the
manual retention latch into the closed position.

Step 10. Press the attention button—the power LED will start to blink.

Step 11. Wait for the power LED to stop blinking—the PCI-X card is now active.

Step 12. Replace the top cover.

Step 13. Push the HP Server all the way back into the rack until it stops.

Understanding LEDs and Hardware Errors


The following table describes the hot-plug LED error conditions.
Table 4-7 Hot-Plug LED Descriptions

Power LED-Green Condition Description

On PCI-X slot is powered on.

Blinking Hot-plug operation in progress—do not touch the slot.

Off PCI-X slot is powered off.

Attention LED-Amber Condition Description

On Hardware operational fault.


NOTE: If slot is powered on, it will not power off. If slot is powered
off, it will not power on.

Blinking Slot location being indicated.


NOTE: If you want to learn how to activate the attention LED into
the blinking/indicator state, read Interface Card OL* Support for
HP-UX Servers and Workstations, Turning Attention LED to Blink or
Off, B2355-90804 at http://docs.hp.com.

Off If power to slot is on, the slot is functioning normally.

Troubleshooting PCI-X Hot-Plug Operations


Sometimes a PCI-X card will not come online during a hot-plug operation due to a frequency mismatch between the PCI-X
card and the slot bus or due to other hardware errors. To determine the type of error you are experiencing, observe the LED
activity as described below. For a full understanding and description of HP-UX 11i v2 hardware errors, read Interface Card
OL* Support for HP-UX Servers and Workstations, Important Considerations, B2355-90804 at http://docs.hp.com.

1. PCI-X Bus Mode or Frequency Mismatch


After you insert a PCI-X card into the slot and push the attention button, the power LED goes from blinking to steady-off
and stays at steady-off; This means that the system firmware has rejected the PCI-X card and indicates either
bus-frequency or bus-mode mismatch.

NOTE After pushing the attention button, ensure that you wait the full duration of the 5 second operation
cancellation window before taking further action.

Chapter 4 63
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Hot-Plug PCI-X

2. Hardware Operation Fault


If the PCI-X card cannot be powered on during a hot-plug addition operation, the attention LED will turn steady-on and
the power LED will go steady-off.

CAUTION If your card will not power up, the power loss may be due to the existing PCI-X expansion cards using all
the available power. Check the power ratings of your existing PCI-X cards. A known cause of power loss
is the use of more than 3 RAID cards in your system.

If the PCI-X card cannot be powered off during a hot-plug removal operation, the attention button will turn steady-on and
the power LED will remain steady-on.

CAUTION If your slot does not power off during a hot-plug removal operation, do not open the manual retention
latch (MRL) on the OLX divider. This action causes system failure or operating system crashes.

64 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Converting SCSI From Simplex to Duplex

Converting SCSI From Simplex to Duplex


This section explains how to convert your hp Integrity rx4640 Server from simplex to duplex operation. The process involves
removing a jumper cable, installing a duplex PCA card, and plugging in the stowed channel B cable to the appropriate sockets.

NOTE In simplex mode, you may remove the cover from channel B for connection of external SCSI devices.
The Windows operating system only supports duplex operation.

Safety Information
Follow the procedures listed below to ensure safe handling of components and to prevent harm to both you and the HP Server:

• Use an antistatic wrist strap and a grounding mat, such as those included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service
Grounding Kit (HP 9300-1155).
• Handle accessory boards and components by the edges only. Do not touch any metal-edge connectors or any electrical
components on accessory boards.
• Do not wear clothing subject to static charge build-up, such as wool or synthetic materials.

WARNING Hazardous voltages are present inside the HP Server. Always remove AC power from the server
and associated assemblies while working inside the unit. Serious injury may result if this warning is
not observed.

CAUTION Some restrictions apply to the mass storage devices that may be connected to your core I/O SCSI HBA. See
“Core I/O Connections” on page 71. If you convert your system to duplex configuration, you may not install
external SCSI devices to the SCSI HBA core I/O controller.

Accessing the SCSI Backplane Board


Prior to adding the accessories required to convert your hp Integrity rx4640 Server from simplex to duplex you must remove
outer components to access the SCSI backplane board. To gain access to the SCSI backplane board perform the following
steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

NOTE If your HP Server is pedestal mounted, you need not remove the pedestal to perform the simplex
to duplex conversion. Proceed directly to the next step.

Step 2. Remove the front bezel. See “Front Bezel” on page 144.

Step 3. Remove the front cover. See “Removing the Front Cover” on page 145.

Step 4. Remove the memory extender board. See “Memory Extender Board” on page 151.

Step 5. Remove the processor extender board. See “Memory Extender Board” on page 151.

Chapter 4 65
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Converting SCSI From Simplex to Duplex

Convert to Duplex
To convert to duplex, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Remove the SCSI Jumper Cable. A SCSI jumper cable bridges the two SCSI connectors on the SCSI backplane
when the server is configured for simplex operation. This jumper must be removed in order to install the duplex
board and to connect the SCSI B cable. See Figure 4-18, “Removing the SCSI Jumper Cable.”

Figure 4-18Removing the SCSI Jumper Cable

Step 2. Install the duplex board. The duplex board is installed in the SCSI connector located nearest the disk drive cage.
The duplex board is shipped with a duplex board bracket attached. When the duplex board is properly installed, it
is secured to the disk drive cage by the bracket and to the SCSI backplane board by the SCSI connector sockets.
See Figure 4-19, “Installing the Duplex Board.”

NOTE In simplex mode, both hard disk drives, slot 0 and slot 1, are driven by SCSI channel A. When the
duplex board is installed, slot 1 hard disk drive is now driven by SCSI channel B. If HP-UX was
previously installed and “whole disk vxfs” was not used, the system will no longer boot. Refer to
the HP-UX Installation Guide for further information.

66 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Converting SCSI From Simplex to Duplex

• Align the bracket tabs with the slots on the side of the disk drive cage.

• Press the bracket against the disk drive cage until the bracket locks into place.

• Align the connector of the duplex board with the connector on the SCSI backplane.

• Press the board connector into the backplane connector.

NOTE When the duplex board is installed properly, the board will be secured in the duplex board bracket.
The SCSI B cable will be connected to the connector at the immediate left of the duplex board.

Figure 4-19Installing the Duplex Board

Step 3. Install the SCSI cable B to the SCSI backplane board. See Figure 4-20, “Installing SCSI Cable B to the SCSI
Backplane.”

• Release the SCSI B cable from its stowed position within the chassis.

Chapter 4 67
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Converting SCSI From Simplex to Duplex

• Plug the SCSI cable B connector into the SCSI connector located on the backplane next to the duplex board
installed in the previous step.

Figure 4-20Installing SCSI Cable B to the SCSI Backplane

Step 4. The SCSI duplex conversion is completed by connecting the other end of SCSI cable B to the SCSI B channel
connector on the SCSI adapter board. See Figure 4-21, “Installing SCSI Cable B to the SCSI Adapter Board.”

• Release the SCSI B cable from its stowed position within the chassis.

68 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Converting SCSI From Simplex to Duplex

• Plug the SCSI cable B connector into the SCSI B channel connector located at the rear of the board.

Figure 4-21Installing SCSI Cable B to the SCSI Adapter Board

Chapter 4 69
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Replacing the Removed Modules

Replacing the Removed Modules


To return the server to operational configuration, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Replace the processor extender board.

Step 2. Replace the memory extender board.

Step 3. Replace the front and top covers.

Step 4. Replace the front bezel.

Step 5. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server back into the rack until it stops.

70 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Core I/O Connections

Core I/O Connections


Each hp Integrity rx4640 Server core I/O includes:

• Two USB ports


• One UDMA-100 IDE port (40 pin IDE connector)
• SVGA controller (DE15S connector)
• One common server management (CSM)

— One 10/100 LAN-RJ45


— Three serial ports
• SCSI host bus adapter (HBA)

— The SCSI HBA board is required to attach SCSI external mass storage to the system.
— Connections to the SCSI board include the external SCSI channels for external mass storage devices.

CAUTION Some restrictions apply to external mass storage devices that you may want to connect to channel B of
your core I/O SCSI HBA. External connections to channel B of your SCSI HBA controller are only
supported in simplex configuration, when the internal cable between the SCSI backplane and the SCSI
HBA card is disconnected. If you convert your system to duplex configuration (see “Converting SCSI
From Simplex to Duplex” on page 65), you may not connect external SCSI devices to channel B of the
SCSI HBA.

• LAN Connection

— The LAN board provides the basic external I/O connectivity for the system.
— Connections to the LAN card include one 10/100/1000 Base-T LAN RJ45 connector.

Management Processor (MP)


The management processor is an independent support system for the server. It provides a way for you to connect to your HP
Server and perform administration or monitoring tasks for the server hardware.
The management processor controls power, reset, transfer of control (TOC) capabilities, provides console access, displays and
records system events, and can display detailed information about the various internal subsystems. The management processor
also provides a virtual front panel that can be used to monitor the front panel LEDs from a remote location.
The management processor is available whenever the system is connected to a power source, even if the hp Integrity rx4640
Server main power switch is in the off position.
Access to the management processor can be restricted by user accounts. User accounts can be password-protected and provide
a specific level of access to the server and management processor commands.
Multiple users can interact with the management processor. From the MP Main Menu users can select any of the following
options: enter management processor command mode, enter console, view event logs, view console history, display virtual
front panel, enter console session, or connect to another management processor. Multiple users can select different options
from the MP Main Menu at the same time. However, management processor command mode and console mode are mirrored.
The MP allows only one user at a time to have write access to the shared console.

Chapter 4 71
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Core I/O Connections

Accessing the Management Processor


You can connect to the management processor using the following methods:

• The local serial port using a local terminal


• The remote CSM port using external modem (dial-up) access, if remote modem access is configured
• The management processor LAN port using web console or telnet, if login access through the management processor
LAN is enabled

Local Terminal Access to the Management Processor


Communication with the management processor is established by connecting a terminal to the local CSM I/O serial port.
A terminal session may be established using a standalone terminal, or using terminal emulation software such as Reflection 1
running on a PC.
During installation, communicating with the management processor enables such tasks as:

• Verifying that the components are present and installed correctly


• Setting the LAN IP addresses

Setting Terminal Parameters


After powering on the terminal, ensure the communications settings are as follows:

• 8/none (parity)
• 9600 baud
• None (receive)
• None (transmit)
If the terminal is a PC using Reflection 1, check or change these communications settings by performing the following steps:

Step 1. From the Reflection 1 Main screen, pull down the Connection menu and select Connection Setup.

Step 2. Select Serial Port.

Step 3. Select Com1.

Step 4. Check the settings and change, if required.

Go to More Settings to set Xon/Xoff. Click OK to close the More Settings window.

Step 5. Click OK to close the Connection Setup window.

Step 6. Pull down the Setup menu and select Terminal (under the Emulation tab).

Step 7. Select a supported terminal type.

The preferred type is VT100.

Step 8. Click Apply.

This option is not highlighted if the terminal type you want is already selected.

Step 9. Click OK.

72 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Core I/O Connections

Network Access to the Management Processor


By connecting the management processor LAN port to an active network, another host on the same subnet can set the
management processor IP address via the ping command. After the IP address has been set, a telnet session can be established
to configure additional parameters.
To configure the management processor LAN IP address, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Determine the medium access control (MAC) address of the management processor LAN interface by viewing the
label located at the rear of the server

Step 2. Connect a LAN cable on your local subnet to the core I/O LAN port found directly above the two USB ports.

Step 3. Add an address resolution protocol (ARP) table entry to another host located on your local subnet. This ARP table
entry will map the MAC address of the core I/O LAN interface to the IP address chosen for that interface.

NOTE Adding an entry to the ARP table is typically done using the ARP command with the appropriate
option. For example, arp -s is used with Windows. Consult your operating system
documentation for more information.

Step 4. Use the ping command from the host that has the new ARP table entry. The destination address is the IP address
that is mapped to the MAC address of the management processor. The management processor LAN port should
now be configured with the appropriate IP address.

Step 5. Use the telnet command to connect to the management processor from a host on the local subnet.

Interacting with the Management Processor


To interact with the management processor, perform the following steps:

NOTE On initial system installation, the MP has two default user accounts. They are:
1. Administrator level user; login=Admin, password=Admin (both are case sensitive).
2. Operator level user; login=Oper, pasword=Oper (both are case sensitive).
For security reasons, it is recommended that the UC command be used during the initial logon session (enter
CM at the MP> prompt, and enter UC at the MP:CM> prompt) to modify default passwords or to delete and
create user accounts.

Step 1. Log in using your management processor user account name and password.

NOTE The management processor will start with the MP Main Menu displayed. To follow these steps,
make sure you are at the Main Menu. If you are not at the Main Menu, use CTRL+B to return to
the Main Menu.

Step 2. Use the management processor menus and commands as needed. Main menu commands are shown in Figure 4-22,
“The MP Main Menu.” Commands not displayed in the MP Main Menu can be accessed in command mode by
first using the CM command at the MP prompt. A list of available commands is presented and can be displayed by
using the management processor help function (enter HE followed by LI at the MP> prompt). You can return to the
MP Main Menu by typing CTRL+B.

Chapter 4 73
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Core I/O Connections

Step 3. Log out using the X command (enter X at the MP> prompt) after returning to the MP Main Menu.

Figure 4-22The MP Main Menu

MP MAIN MENU:
CO: Console
VFP: Virtual Front Panel
CM: Command Menu
CL: Console Logs
SL: Show Event Logs
CSP: Connect to Service Processor
SE: Create OS Session
HE: Main Menu Help
X: Exit Connection

Configuring Management Processor LAN Information


LAN information includes the management processor network name, the management processor IP address, the management
processor subnet mask, the management processor gateway address, and the web console port number.
To set the management processor LAN IP address:

Step 1. At the MP Main Menu prompt (MP>), enter CM to select command mode.

Step 2. At the command mode prompt (MP:CM>), enter LC (for LAN configuration).

The screen displays the default values and asks if you want to modify them. It is good practice to write down the
information, as it may be required for future troubleshooting. See “The LC Command Screen”.

NOTE The value in the “IP address” field is set at the factory. The customer must provide the actual
management processor LAN IP address.

Step 3. The current lc data is displayed. When prompted to enter a parameter name, A to modify All, or Q to Quit,
enter A to select all parameters.

Step 4. The current IP address is displayed. When prompted to enter a new value or Q, enter the new IP address.

Step 5. The current host name is displayed. When prompted to enter a new value or Q, enter the new management
processor network name.

This is the host name for the management processor LAN, The name can be up to 64 characters in length, and can
include dashes, underlines, periods, and spaces.

Step 6. The current subnet mask name is displayed. When prompted to enter a new value or Q, enter the new subnet mask
name.

Step 7. The current gateway address is displayed. When prompted to enter a new value or Q, enter the new gateway
address.

Step 8. The current web console port number is displayed. When prompted to enter a new value or Q, just hit enter. The
message -> Current Web Console Port Number has been retained will be displayed.

Step 9. The current link state information is displayed. When prompted to enter a new value or Q, just press enter. The
message -> Current Link State has been retained will be displayed.

74 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Core I/O Connections

Step 10. A new lc listing is displayed, including the values entered in the preceding steps. Verify that the desired values
have been accepted. When prompted to enter a parameter for revision, Y to confirm, or Q to Quit, enter Y to
confirm all parameters.

Step 11. Observe the following display:


> LAN Configuration has been updated

-> Reset MP (XD command option ‘R’) for configuration to take effect.

MP Host Name: name

(the name entered in step 5)


MP:CM>

Step 12. Enter XD -reset to reset the MP.

Step 13. After the MP resets, log into the MP again. Then enter the MP command mode (enter CM at the MP: prompt).

Step 14. At the MP:CM> prompt, enter LS to confirm the new LAN settings.

Step 15. Enter SA to enable/disable web console and telnet access after the MP has been reset.

Figure 4-23The LC Command Screen

MP:CM> lc -ip 127.0.0.1 -host uninitialized -mask 255.255.255.0 -gate 127.0.0.1 -web 2003

New LAN Configuration (* modified value):

* IP Address: 127.0.0.1

* MP Host Name: uninitialized

* Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0

* Gateway Address: 127.0.0.1

Link State: Auto Negotiate

* Web Console Port Number: 2023

Confirm? (Y/ {N}) : y

-> LAN configuration has been updated

-> Reset the MP (XD command option ‘R’ ) for confirmation to take effect.

MP Host Name : uninitialized

MP:CM> xd -reset

Management Processor Commands


Table 4-8 Management Processor Commands and Descriptions

Command Description

BP Reset BMC passwords

Chapter 4 75
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Core I/O Connections

Table 4-8 Management Processor Commands and Descriptions (Continued)

Command Description

CA Configure serial port parameters

CE Log a repair in the history buffer

CL Display console history

CG Certificate generator

CO Return to redirected console mode

CSP Connect to another service processor

CT Configure trace

DATE Display date

DC Default configuration

DF Display FRUID

DI Disconnect remote or LAN console

FW MP firmware upgrade

HE Display help for menu or command

ID System information

IT Modify MP inactivity timers

LC LAN configuration

LOC Locater LED control

LS LAN status

MA Return to main menu

MR Modem reset

MS Modem status

PC Remote power control

PG Configure paging

PR Power restore policy configuration

PS Power management module status

RB Reset BMC through toggle GPIO pin

RS Request BMC to reset system through RST signal

SA Configure remote/modem-LAN telnet and web access options

SE Activate a system session on locator remote port

76 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Core I/O Connections

Table 4-8 Management Processor Commands and Descriptions (Continued)

Command Description

SL Show logs

SO Security options and access control

SYSREV Display all firmware revisions

SS System status of processor modules

TC Transfer of control-system reset through INIT signal

TE Tell-send a message to other users

UC User configuration

VT Display software trace

VFP Virtual front panel

WHO Display connected management processor users

XD MP diagnostics and/or reset

Chapter 4 77
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Fibre Channel (FC) Boot Configuration

Fibre Channel (FC) Boot Configuration


The following procedure details how to restore a Fibre Channel (FC) disk to your boot environment.

NOTE The operator should be knowledgeable about navigating in the EFI shell environment to perform the
following procedure.
The screen output shown in this procedure and the bold type that is selected in each of the steps is from a
hypothetical test setup only; your screen output will show the actual configuration of your own hp Integrity
rx4640 Server.

Step 1. Find the driver number for your FC disk(s). At the EFI shell enter the following command to display all devices
and their associated drivers.
Shell> drivers

T D

D Y C I

R P F A

V VERSION E G G #D #C DRIVER NAME IMAGE NAME

== ======== = = = == == =================================== ===================

12 00000010 B - - 6 20 PCI Bus Driver PciBus

1D 01020000 B X X 2 3 LSI Logic Ultra160 SCSI Driver PciRom Seg=00000000

1E 01020000 B X X 1 2 LSI Logic Ultra160 SCSI Driver PciRom Seg=00000000

23 00000109 D X X 1 - HP Tachyon XL2 Fibre Channel Mass S PciRom Seg=00000000

2A 00000110 D X X 1 - HP Tachyon XL2 Fibre Channel Mass S PciRom Seg=00000000

2E 00000029 D - - 2 - Usb Ohci Driver UsbOhci

2F 00000010 B - - 2 3 USB Bus Driver UsbBus

30 00001010 D X - 1 - Usb Keyboard Driver UsbKb

31 00000010 D - - 2 - Usb Mouse Driver UsbMouse

32 00000010 ? - - - - Usb Bot Mass Storage Driver UsbBot

33 00000010 ? - - - - Usb Cbi0 Mass Storage Driver UsbCbi0

34 00000010 ? - - - - <UNKNOWN> UsbCbi1

35 00000010 ? - - - - Generic USB Mass Storage Driver UsbMassStorage

36 00000010 ? - - - - UGA Console Driver GraphicsConsole

37 00000000 D - - 1 - PCI VGA Mini Port Driver PciVgaMiniPort

38 00000010 D - - 1 - VGA Class Driver VgaClassDriver

39 00000010 B - - 1 1 Serial 16550 UART Driver Serial16550

3A 00000010 B - - 1 1 Serial Terminal Driver Terminal

3B 00000010 D - - 2 - Platform Console Management Driver ConPlatform

78 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Fibre Channel (FC) Boot Configuration

3C 00000010 D - - 2 - Platform Console Management Driver ConPlatform

3D 00000010 B - - 2 2 Console Splitter Driver ConSplitter

3E 00000010 B - - 2 2 Console Splitter Driver ConSplitter

3F 00000010 B - - 2 2 Console Splitter Driver ConSplitter

40 00000010 B - - 2 2 Console Splitter Driver ConSplitter

49 00000010 D - - 14 - Generic Disk I/O Driver DiskIo

4A 00000010 B - - 3 10 Partition Driver(MBR/GPT/El Torito) Partition

4B 00000010 D - - 3 - FAT File System Driver Fat

4C 00000010 B X X 1 1 PCI IDE/ATAPI Bus Driver Ide

4D 00000010 ? - - - - Intel(R) PRO 100 UNDI Driver Undi

4E 00030007 B X X 3 3 Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Driver b75Undi64

4F 00000010 D - - 3 - Simple Network Protocol Driver Snp3264

50 00000010 D - - 3 - PXE Base Code Driver PxeBc

51 00000010 D - - 3 - PXE DHCPv4 Driver PxeDhcp4

Step 2. Determine the controller handle associated with each of the two listed drivers (23 and 2A) by typing the following
command:
Shell> drvcfg -c 23

Configurable Components

Drv[23] Ctrl[29] Lang[eng]Shell> drvcfg -c 2a

Configurable Components

Drv[2A] Ctrl[2C] Lang[eng]

Step 3. Set the enumeration option for the driver 23 and controller 29 by typing the following command and selecting 1
from the enumeration policy menu:
Shell> drvcfg –s 23 29

Current policy: Enumerate all Fibre Channel devices

Please select the desired enumeration policy:

0 : Enumerate all Fibre Channel boot devices in the boot option list

1 : Enumerate all Fibre Channel devices

Q : exit with no change

Policy > 1

Drv[23] Ctrl[29] Lang[eng] - Options set. Action Required is None

Step 4. Set the enumeration option for the driver 2a and controller 2c by typing the following command and selecting 1
from the enumeration policy menu:
Shell> drvcfg –s 2a 2c

Current policy: Enumerate all Fibre Channel devices

Please select the desired enumeration policy:

Chapter 4 79
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Fibre Channel (FC) Boot Configuration

0 : Enumerate all Fibre Channel boot devices in the boot option list

1 : Enumerate all Fibre Channel devices

Q : exit with no change

Policy > 1

Drv[2A] Ctrl[2C] Lang[eng] - Options set. Action Required is None

Step 5. Allow the FC devices to be scanned by typing the following command:


Shell> reconnect –r

Step 6. Allow the file systems to be mapped by typing the following command:
Shell> map -r

Device mapping table

fs0 : Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Scsi(Pun1,Lun0)/HD(Part1,Sig11D3A260-CDCC-0

1C2-507B-9E5F8078F531)

fs1 : Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|1)/Scsi(Pun0,Lun0)/HD(Part1,Sig55A90000)

fs2 : Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)/Fibre(WWN21000020375AE714,Lun0)/HD(Part1,Si

gF7D00000)

fs3 : Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)/Fibre(WWN21000020375A5E5B,Lun0)/HD(Part1,Si

g7D930000)

fs4 : Acpi(HWP0002,600)/Pci(1|0)/Scsi(Pun4,Lun0)/HD(Part1,Sig70BEA120-E7EA-0

1C2-507B-9E5F8078F531)

blk0 : Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(3|0)/Ata(Primary,Master)

blk1 : Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Scsi(Pun1,Lun0)

blk2 : Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Scsi(Pun1,Lun0)/HD(Part1,Sig11D3A260-CDCC-0

1C2-507B-9E5F8078F531)

blk3 : Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Scsi(Pun1,Lun0)/HD(Part2,Sig11E8FF20-CDCC-0

1C2-F1B3-12714F758821)

blk4 : Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Scsi(Pun1,Lun0)/HD(Part3,Sig2173E520-FDD5-0

1C2-A1F4-04622FD5EC6D)

blk5 : Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Scsi(Pun1,Lun0)/HD(Part4,Sig8274F148-6685-1

1D7-8BC4-B6CD81B7B01F)

blk6 : Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Scsi(Pun1,Lun0)/HD(Part5,Sig82757488-6685-1

1D7-8BC4-B6CD81B7B01F)

blk7 : Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|1)/Scsi(Pun0,Lun0)

blk8 : Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|1)/Scsi(Pun0,Lun0)/HD(Part1,Sig55A90000)

blk9 : Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|1)/Scsi(Pun0,Lun0)/HD(Part2,Sig55A90000)

blkA : Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)/Fibre(WWN21000020375AE714,Lun0)

80 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Fibre Channel (FC) Boot Configuration

blkB : Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)/Fibre(WWN21000020375AE714,Lun0)/HD(Part1,Si

gF7D00000)

blkC : Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)/Fibre(WWN21000020375AE714,Lun0)/HD(Part2,Si

gF7D00000)

blkD : Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)/Fibre(WWN21000020375A5E5B,Lun0)

blkE : Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)/Fibre(WWN21000020375A5E5B,Lun0)/HD(Part1,Si

g7D930000)

blkF : Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)/Fibre(WWN21000020375A5E5B,Lun0)/HD(Part2,Si

g7D930000)

blk10 : Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)/Fibre(WWN210000203760083D,Lun0)

blk11 : Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)/Fibre(WWN21000020370FC9C0,Lun0)

blk12 : Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)/Fibre(WWN2100002037600863,Lun0)

blk13 : Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)/Fibre(WWN21000020375A61C4,Lun0)

blk14 : Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)/Fibre(WWN21000020375AE6C1,Lun0)

blk15 : Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)/Fibre(WWN21000020375A6215,Lun0)

blk16 : Acpi(HWP0002,600)/Pci(1|0)/Scsi(Pun4,Lun0)

blk17 : Acpi(HWP0002,600)/Pci(1|0)/Scsi(Pun4,Lun0)/HD(Part1,Sig70BEA120-E7EA-0

1C2-507B-9E5F8078F531)

blk18 : Acpi(HWP0002,600)/Pci(1|0)/Scsi(Pun4,Lun0)/HD(Part2,Sig70EC67E0-E7EA-0

1C2-F1B3-12714F758821)

blk19 : Acpi(HWP0002,600)/Pci(1|0)/Scsi(Pun4,Lun0)/HD(Part3,Sig7612C3E0-E7EA-0

1C2-D931-F8428177D974)

NOTE Record the path of your FC device(s) from the file system map, for later use in this procedure.

Step 7. Return to the EFI boot manager interface by typing the following command:
Shell> exit

Step 8. From the EFI boot manager menu, select Boot Option Maintenance Menu.
EFI Boot Manager ver 1.10 [14.61] Firmware ver 79.03 [4321]

Please select a boot option

EFI Shell [Built-in]

Internal Bootable DVD

Boot Option Maintenance Menu

System Configuration Menu

Use ^ and v to change option(s). Use Enter to select an option

Step 9. From the boot maintenance manager select Add a Boot Option.

Chapter 4 81
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Fibre Channel (FC) Boot Configuration

EFI Boot Maintenance Manager ver 1.10 [14.61]

Main Menu. Select an Operation

Boot from a File

Add a Boot Option

Delete Boot Option(s)

Change Boot Order

Manage BootNext setting

Set Auto Boot TimeOut

Select Active Console Output Devices

Select Active Console Input Devices

Select Active Standard Error DevicesCold Reset

Exit

Timeout-->[7] sec SystemGuid-->[BC3ED547-6466-11D7-B97D-2EC59A23C6E2]

SerialNumber-->[A21596378 ]

Step 10. Select the volume to be added.


EFI Boot Maintenance Manager ver 1.10 [14.61]

Add a Boot Option. Select a Volume

SHULERVOL [Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Scsi(Pun1,Lun0)/HD(Part1,S

IA64_EFI [Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|1)/Scsi(Pun0,Lun0)/HD(Part1,Si

IA64_EFI [Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)/Fibre(WWN21000020375AE714,L

IA64_EFI [Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)/Fibre(WWN21000020375A5E5B,L

NO VOLUME LABEL [Acpi(HWP0002,600)/Pci(1|0)/Scsi(Pun4,Lun0)/HD(P

Removable Media Boot [Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(3|0)/Ata(Primary,Maste

Load File [EFI Shell [Built-in]]

Load File [Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(2|0)/Mac(00306E39115D)]

Load File [Acpi(HWP0002,200)/Pci(1|0)/Mac(001018042056)]

Load File [Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(1|0)/Mac(00101804205A)]

Exit

Step 11. Select the appropriate files to describe the address of the new FC boot option.
Select file or change to new directory:

04/15/03 11:25p <DIR> 4,096 EFI

[Treat like Removable Media Boot]

Exit

EFI Boot Maintenance Manager ver 1.10 [14.61]

Select file or change to new directory:

82 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Fibre Channel (FC) Boot Configuration

04/15/03 11:25p <DIR> 4,096 .

04/15/03 11:25p <DIR> 0 ..

04/15/03 11:25p <DIR> 4,096 HPUX

04/15/03 11:25p <DIR> 4,096 Intel_Firmware

04/15/03 11:25p <DIR> 4,096 DIAG

04/15/03 11:25p <DIR> 4,096 HP

04/15/03 11:25p <DIR> 4,096 TOOLS

Exit

EFI Boot Maintenance Manager ver 1.10 [14.61]

Select file or change to new directory:

04/15/03 11:25p <DIR> 4,096 .

04/15/03 11:25p <DIR> 4,096 ..

05/05/03 04:54p 425,747 HPUX.EFI

05/05/03 04:54p 24,576 NBP.EFI

Exit

Step 12. Enter a description of the new FC boot device and the data type.
Filename: \EFI\HPUX\HPUX.EFI

DevicePath: [Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)/Fibre(WWN21000020375AE714,Lun0)/HD(Par

t1,SigF7D00000)/\EFI\HPUX\HPUX.EFI]

IA-64 EFI Application 05/05/03 04:54p 425,747 bytes

Enter New Description: FC Boot Disk

New BootOption Data. ASCII/Unicode strings only, with max of 240 characters

Enter BootOption Data Type [A-Ascii U-Unicode N-No BootOption] : n

Save changes to NVRAM [Y-Yes N-No]: y

Step 13. The procedure is now complete and the FC disk will show up in the boot menu.
EFI Boot Manager ver 1.10 [14.61] Firmware ver 79.03 [4321]

Please select a boot option

EFI Shell [Built-in]

Internal Bootable DVD

FC Boot Disk

Boot Option Maintenance Menu

Chapter 4 83
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Fibre Channel (FC) Boot Configuration

System Configuration Menu

Use ^ and v to change option(s). Use Enter to select an option

84 Chapter 4
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Booting the Server

Booting the Server


To boot the server, perform the following step.

1. Depress the power switch located to the left of the front panel LEDs.

NOTE If the front bezel is attached and in the closed position, you will need to open the small door on the front bezel
to gain access to the power switch.

If the autoboot function is enabled, the system will boot to the installed operating system. If autoboot is not enabled, the
system will enter the EFI boot manager. The EFI boot manager allows you to control the server’s booting environment. For
more information about the EFI boot manager, review Chapter 5, “Utilities.”

Chapter 4 85
Installing Additional Components and Configuring
Booting the Server

86 Chapter 4
5 Utilities

Extensible Firmware Interface (EFI) Boot Manager


EFI (Extensible Firmware Interface) is an OS and platform-independent boot and preboot interface. EFI lies between the OS
and platform firmware, allowing the OS to boot without having details about the underlying hardware and firmware. EFI
supports boot devices; uses a flat memory model; and hides platform and firmware details from the OS.

NOTE EFI and Pre-OS System Environment (POSSE) are similar. EFI is an Intel specification, whereas POSSE is
the HP implementation that aids HP support.

EFI consolidates boot utilities found in PA-RISC based systems, such as the Boot Console Handler (BCH), and platform
firmware into a single platform firmware. EFI allows the selection of any EFI OS loader from any boot medium that is
supported by EFI boot services. An EFI OS loader supports multiple options on the user interface.
EFI supports booting from media that contain an EFI OS loader or an EFI-defined System Partition. An EFI-defined System
Partition is required by EFI to boot from a block device.

Figure 5-1 EFI Boot Sequence

EFI EFI EFI


Driver Applicati Bootcode OS

Retry EFI
FAILUR

Platform EFI Boot


EFI Image
Init OS Loader Services
Load
Load

Standard Drivers and Boot from Operation


firmware application ordered handed off
platform loaded list of to OS
initialization iteratively EFIOS Loader

API Value add


Boot EFI

Chapter 5 87
Utilities
Extensible Firmware Interface (EFI) Boot Manager

The EFI boot manager loads EFI applications (including OS first stage loader) and EFI drivers from an EFI-defined file
system or image loading service. NVRAM variables point to the file to be loaded. These variables contain application-specific
data that is passed directly to the EFI application. EFI variables provides system firmware a boot menu that points to all the
operating systems, even multiple versions of the same operating systems.
The EFI boot manager allows you to control the server’s booting environment. Depending on how you have configured the
boot options, after the server is powered up the boot manager presents you with different ways to bring up the system. For
example, you can boot to the EFI shell, to an operating system located on the network or residing on media in the server, or the
Boot Maintenance menu.

• Boot from a File—Automatically adds EFI applications as boot options or allows you to boot from a specific file. When
you choose this option, the system searches for an EFI directory. If the EFI directory is found, then it looks in each of the
subdirectories below EFI. In each of those subdirectories, it looks for the first file that is an executable EFI application.
Each of the EFI applications that meet this criterion can be automatically added as a boot option. In addition, legacy boot
options for A: and C: are also added if those devices are present. You can also launch a specific application without adding
it as a boot option. In this case the EFI boot manager searches the root directories and the \EFI\TOOLS directories of all of
the EFI system partitions present in the system for the specified EFI application.
• Add a Boot Option—Adds a boot option to the EFI boot manager. You specify the option by providing the name of the
EFI application. Along with the name you can also provide either ASCII or UNICODE arguments the file might use.
Given the EFI application name and any options, the EFI boot manager searches for the executable file in the same
directories as described in “Boot from a File” option. When the file is found, it is executed.
• Delete Boot Options—Deletes a specific boot option or all boot options
• Change Boot Order—Controls the relative order in which the EFI boot manager attempts boot options. For help on the
control key sequences you need for this option, refer to the help menu.
• Manage BootNext Setting—Selects a boot option to use one time (the next boot operation)
• Set Automatic Boot Timeout—Defines the value in seconds that pass before the system automatically boots without user
intervention. Setting this value to zero disables the timeout feature.
• Exit—Returns control to the EFI boot manager main menu. This displays the active boot devices, including a possible
integrated shell (if the implementation is so constructed).

EFI Commands
Table 5-1 lists EFI commands for the hp Integrity rx4640 Server. The equivalent BCH commands found in PA-RISC based
systems are also listed.
Table 5-1 EFI Commands

BCH Command
EFI Shell Command BCH Command Parameters Definition
Equivalent

These commands are found in all other menus

info boot Boot [PRI|HAA|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path

help <command> HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for specified


command or menu

reset RESET Reset the system (to allow


reconfiguration of complex

exit (at EFI shell) MAin Return to the main menu

MAin

88 Chapter 5
Utilities
Extensible Firmware Interface (EFI) Boot Manager

Table 5-1 EFI Commands (Continued)

BCH Command
EFI Shell Command BCH Command Parameters Definition
Equivalent

EFI boot manager PAth [PRI|HAA|ALT|CON|KEY|<path>] Display or modify a path


“change boot order”

bcfg SEArch [ALL] Search for boot devices

bcfg SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>] Search for boot devices

many commands ScRoll [ON|OFF] Display or change scrolling


offer a [-b] parameter capability
to cause 25 line
breaks

COnfiguration

autoboot AUto [BOot|SEarch|STart] [ON|OFF] Display or set the auto start


flag

info boot BootID [<processor #>[<bootid #>]] Display or set processor boot
identifier

EFI boot manager Boot info Display boot-related


information

autoboot BootTimer [0-200] Seconds allowed for boot


attempt

cpuconfig CPUconfig [<proc>][ON|OFF]] Config/deconfig processor

boottest FastBoot [ON|OFF] or [test] [RUN|SKIP] Display or set boot tests


execution

date Time [cn:yr:mo:dy:hr:mn[:ss]] Read or set the date

time Time [cn:yr:mo:dy:hr:mn[:ss]] Read or set the real time


clock

INformation

info all ALL Display all system


information

info boot BootINfo Display boot-releated


information

info cpu CAche Display cache information

info chiprev ChipRevisions Display revision number of


major VLSI

MP command <df> FRU Display FRU information

info fw FwrVersion Display firmware version for


PDC, ICM, and complex

Chapter 5 89
Utilities
Extensible Firmware Interface (EFI) Boot Manager

Table 5-1 EFI Commands (Continued)

BCH Command
EFI Shell Command BCH Command Parameters Definition
Equivalent

info io IO Display firmware version for


PDC, ICM, and complex

LanAddress LanAddress Display core LAN station


address

info mem Memory Display memory information

info cpu PRocessor Display processor


information

SERvice

errdump clear CLEARPIM Clear (zero) the contents of


PIM

mm MemRead <addr> [<len>] [<type>] Read memory locations


scope of page deallocation

PDT PDT Display or clear the page


deallocation table

errdump mca PIM [<proc>] [HPMC|LPMC|TOC|ASIC]] Display PIM information


errdump cmc (processor internal memory)
errdump init

90 Chapter 5
Utilities
EFI/POSSE Commands

EFI/POSSE Commands
This section describes the EFI/POSSE commands developed for the server.

NOTE EFI and Pre-OS System Environment (POSSE) are similar. EFI is an Intel specification, whereas POSSE is
the HP implementation that aids HP support.

help
Provides information on the EFI shell commands. It also has an additional feature to aid those familiar with the BCH menus to
adjust to their equivalent functions in EFI.

Syntax
help [-b] <category>
help [-b] <cmd>
help [-b] bch <bchmenu> <bchcmd>

Parameters
-b Enable page breaking
category Category of commands to view help on commands
cmd Shell command name on which to provide verbose information
bch Display the list of BCH commands and their corresponding EFI
bchmenu BCH menu name taken from the top level of the BCH menu
bchcmd BCH command on which to display information

Operation
If help is invoked with no parameters, it displays a list of shell command categories. To list all of the commands within a
category, the user should type help <category> (see examples). If invoked with the -b switch, any output longer than one
page pauses after each page is displayed. If a shell command name is used as a parameter, verbose help is displayed for that
command.
If help is invoked with the bch option, it displays a list of BCH commands and their corresponding EFI/POSSE commands. It
instructs the user to repeat the command line followed by a menu name for more information on that menu. If help is invoked
followed by bch and a menu name, it displays a list of commands that appear under that BCH menu. The user may then
invoke help followed by bch, the menu name, and a BCH command name to display information on that command. This
would point the user to the command that has taken the place of that BCH functionality, or will inform the user that the
functionality no longer exists. As a shortcut, the user may enter help followed by bch and a BCH command name to go
straight to that command.

Example 5-1 help Command


Shell> help
List of classes of commands:

boot -- Booting options and disk-related commands


configuration -- Changing and retrieving system information
devices -- Getting device, driver and handle information
memory -- Memory related commands
shell -- Basic shell navigation and customization
scripts -- EFI shell-script commandsType "help" followed by a class name for a list of commands in
that class
Type "help" followed by command name for full documentation

Chapter 5 91
Utilities
EFI/POSSE Commands

Example 5-2 help configuration Command


Shell> help configuration
Configuration commands:

cpuconfig -- Deconfigure or reconfigure cpus


date -- Display or set date
err -- Display or set error level
esiproc -- Make an ESI call
errdump -- View/Clear logs
info -- Display hardware information
monarch -- View or set the monarch processor
palproc -- Make a PAL call
salproc -- Make a SAL call
time -- Display or set time
ver -- Displays version info

Type "help" followed by command name for full documentationon that command.
Type "help -a" to display a list of all commands.

Example 5-3 help cpuconfig Command


Shell> help cpuconfig

CPUCONFIG [cpu] [on|off]

cpu Specifies which cpu to configure


on|off Specifies to configure or deconfigure a cpu

Notes:
1. Cpu status will not change until next boot

Examples:
* To deconfigure CPU 0
fs0:\> cpuconfig 0 off
CPU will be deconfigured on the next boot

* To display configuration status of cpus


fs0:\> cpuconfig
<CPU configuration data displayed>

Example 5-4 help bch Command


COnfiguration help bch co
INformation help bch in
PAth help bch pa
ScRool help bch sr
SEArch help bch sea
SERvice help bch ser
BOot help bch bo
HElp help bch he
RESET help bch reset
MAin help bch ma

For more help on one of the commands above, at the prompt type:
help bch COMMAND

baud
Sets the baud rate and communication settings for a UART.

92 Chapter 5
Utilities
EFI/POSSE Commands

Syntax
baud <index> <baudrate>

Parameters
<index> 0 through the total number of UARTS minus one
<baudrate> baud rate.

Operation
This command is used to change the speed for a UART in the system. This command works for all UARTs visible to
EFI/POSSE. If the UART is part of PDH space and is initialized by the core firmware, this command communicates the
settings to core firmware so the UART can be initialized with the new settings on the next boot. System default is 9600 baud.
Other Communication parameters are listed in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 Communications Parameters

Parameter Value

RECEIVE_FIFO_DEPTH 1

TIMEOUT 1000000

PARITY No parity

DATA_BITS 8

STOP_BITS 1

CONTROL_MASK 0

boottest
Interacts with the speedy boot variable allowing it to be set appropriately.

Syntax
boottest Displays status of all speedy boot bits
boottest on Run all tests (for a normal boot time)
boottest off Skip all tests (for a faster boot time)
boottest [test] Displays status of specific Speedy Boot bit
boottest [test] [on|off] Sets or clears a specific Speedy Boot bit

Parameters
[test] Each test can be set or cleared:
booting_valid Enable/disable system firmware response to BOOTING
bit. If OS Speedy Boot aware set to on.
early_cpu Enable/disable early CPU selftests.
late_cpu Enable/disable late CPU selftests.
platform Enable/disable system board hardware tests.
chipset Enable/disable CEC tests.
io_hw Enable/disable EFI driver Core I/O tests.
mem_init Enable/disable memory initialization.
mem_test Enable/disable full destructive memory tests.

Chapter 5 93
Utilities
EFI/POSSE Commands

Example 5-5 boottest Command


Shell> boottest
BOOTTEST Settings Default Variable
Selftest Setting
------------- -------------------------
booting_valid On (OS speedy boot aware)
early_cpu Run this test
late_cpu Run this test
platform Run this test
chipset Run this test
io_hw Run this test
mem_init Run this test
mem_test Run this test

Example 5-6 boottest early_cpu off Command


Shell> boottest early_cpu off
BOOTTEST Settings Default Variable
Selftest Setting
------------- -------------------------
booting_valid On (OS speedy boot aware)
early_cpu Skip this test
late_cpu Run this test
platform Run this test
chipset Run this test
io_hw Run this test
mem_init Run this test
mem_test Run this test

cpuconfig
Displays the config/deconfig state of processors in the system and allows the user to configure or reconfigure processors.

Syntax
cpuconfig <cpu> <on|off>

Parameters
<cpu> specify a processor
<on|off> state to set the processor to

Operation
Issuing cpuconfig with no parameters displays the config/deconfig status of all processors. A user can reconfigure CPUs by
specifying a CPU number and a state (on or off). If a valid state is entered and is different from the current state of a CPU, its
status changes on the next boot. The last remaining configured CPU in a system cannot be deconfigured.

Example 5-7 cpuconfig Command


Shell> cpuconfig
PROCESSOR INFORMATION
# of L3 L4 Family/
CPU Logical Cache Cache Model Processor
Slot CPUs Speed Size Size (hex.) Rev State
--- ------- --------- ---- ----- ------ ---- ----------
0 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F/00 B2 Active
1 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F/00 B2 Active
2 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F/00 B2 Active
3 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F/00 B2 Active

94 Chapter 5
Utilities
EFI/POSSE Commands

Example 5-8 cpuconfig 2 Command


Shell> cpuconfig 2 off
CPU will be deconfigured on next boot.

Shell> cpuconfig
PROCESSOR INFORMATION
# of L3 L4 Family/
CPU Logical Cache Cache Model Processor
Slot CPUs Speed Size Size (hex.) Rev State
--- ------- --------- ---- ----- ------ ---- ----------
0 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F/00 B2 Active
1 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F/00 B2 Active
2 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F/00 B2 Sched Deconf
3 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F/00 B2 Active

default
Allows the user to restore NVM to default values and clear NVM storage values.

Syntax
default [efi|sal]
default clear [bmc|efi|sal]

Parameters
clear clears NVM storage values

Operation
Default sets NVM and Stable Store values to predefined default values. To the normal user only a subset of values are
available for default. Executing “default clear” resets the system.

errdump
Displays the contents of processor internal memory logged on the first MCA for all processors present in the system.

Syntax
errdump [mca | cpe | cmc | init | la | clear]

Parameters
mca dumps the Machine Check Abort error log
cpe dumps the Corrected Platform Error log
cmc dumps the Corrected Machine Check log
init dumps the Initialization log
la dumps the Logic Analyzer log
clear erases all of the logs (mca, cpe, cmc, init, la)

Operation
If a user enters no parameters, the usage is displayed. Otherwise, the specified error log is displayed. Adding -n to the clear
parameter disables the confirmation prompt. (The errdump command can also be accessed via the System Configuration
menu.)

Chapter 5 95
Utilities
EFI/POSSE Commands

info
Allows the user to display most system information.

Syntax
info [ -b] [target]

Parameters
target: valid targets are:
all display everything
cpu display information on cpus
cache display information on cache
mem display information on memory
io display information on io
boot display boot-related information
chiprev display information on chip revisions
fw display firmware version information
sys display system information
warning display warning and stop boot information

Example 5-9 info -b all Command


Shell> info -b all
PROCESSOR INFORMATION

# of L3 L4 Family/
CPU Logical Cache Cache Model Processor
Slot CPUs Speed Size Size (hex.) Rev State
---- ------- -------- ------ ------ ------- ---- ------- -
0 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F/01 B2 Active
1 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F/01 B2 Active
2 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F/01 B2 Sched Deconf
3 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F/01 B2 Active

MEMORY INFORMATION
Extender 0:
--- DIMM A ----- ---- DIMM B ----- ----DIMM C ----- ---- DIMM D -----
DIMM Current DIMM Current DIMM Current DIMM Current
--- ------ ---------- ------ ----------- ------ ---------- ----- -------------

0 256 MB Active 256 MB Active 256 MB Active 256 MB Active


1 ---- ---- ---- ----
2 ---- ---- ---- ----
3 ---- ---- ---- ----
4 ---- ---- ---- ----
5 ---- ---- ---- ----
Extender 1:
--- DIMM A ----- ---- DIMM B ----- ----DIMM C ----- ---- DIMM D -----
DIMM Current DIMM Current DIMM Current DIMM Current
--- ------ ---------- ------ ----------- ------ ---------- ----- -------------
0 256 MB Active 256 MB Active 256 MB Active 256 MB Active
1 ---- ---- ---- ----
2 ---- ---- ---- ----
3 ---- ---- ---- ----
4 ---- ---- ---- ----
5 ---- ---- ---- ----

Active Memory : 1024 MB


Installed Memory : 1024 MB

I/O INFORMATION

96 Chapter 5
Utilities
EFI/POSSE Commands

BOOTABLE DEVICES
Order Media Type Path
---- ---------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 HARDDRIVE Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(2|0)/Scsi(Puno,Luno)/HD(Part1,Sig3D1F1
86A-846F-11D1-FB49BB94A768)
2 HARDDRIVE Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(2|0)/Scsi(Pun2,Luno)/HD(Part1,Sig965900000
3 CDROM Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(2|1)/Scsi(Pun4,Luno)/CDROM(Entry0)
4 HARDDRIVE Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Pci(1|1)Scsi(Pun2,Luno)/HD(Part2,SigA45AC380-2588
-11D6-B48C-806D6172696F)
5 HARDDRIVE Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Pci(1|1)/Scsi(Pun2,Luno)/HD(Part2,Sig9C82CD80-70D
2-4E88-A374-B029EBF1D8E4)
Seg Bus Dev Fnc Vendor Device Slot
# # # # ID ID # Path
--- --- --- --- ------ ------- ---- -------------
00 00 01 00 0x103C 0x1290 01 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(1|0)
00 00 01 01 0x103C 0x1048 01 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(1|1)
00 00 02 00 0x1000 0x000B 01 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(2|0)
00 00 02 01 0x1000 0x000B 01 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(2|1)
00 00 04 00 0x1011 0x0026 02 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(4|0)
00 01 04 00 0x1033 0x0035 02 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(4|0)/Pci(4|0)
00 01 04 01 0x1033 0x0035 02 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(4|0)/Pci(4|1)
00 01 04 02 0x1033 0x00E0 02 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(4|0)/Pci(4|2)
00 01 05 00 0x1002 0x5159 02 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(4|0)/Pci(5|0)
00 20 01 00 0x1014 0x01A7 03 Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)
00 21 01 00 0x1000 0x0021 03 Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Pci(1|0)
00 21 01 01 0x1000 0x0021 03 Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Pci(1|1)
00 21 04 00 0x14E4 0x1645 03 Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Pci(4|0)

BOOT INFORMATION
Monarch CPU :
Current Preferred
Monarch Monarch Possible Warnings
------- ------- ------------------
0 0
AutoBoot : ON - Timeout is : 7 sev
Boottest :
OS is not speedy boot aware
Selftest Setting
--------- --------------------
early_cpu Skip this test
late_cpu Run this test
platform Run this test
chipset Run this test
io_hw Run this test
mem_init Run this test
mem_test Run this test

LAN Address Information :


Lan Address Path
------------- ---------------------
*Mac(00306E05B950) Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Pci(4|0)/Mac(00306E05B950
AWARE INFORMATION
verscode : 00.00 xxx
datecode : xxxx
built with : xxxxxxx
Firmware Revision : 2.01 (xxxx)
PAL_A Revision : 7.31
PAL_B Revision : 7.41
SAL Spec Revision : 7.31
SAL_A Revision : 7.41
SAL_B Revision : 7.31
EFI Spec Revision : 7.41
EFI INTEL Drop Revision : 7.31
EFI Build Revision : 7.41

Chapter 5 97
Utilities
EFI/POSSE Commands

POSSE Revision : 7.31


ACPI Revision : 7.41
BMC Revision : 7.31
IPMI Revision : 7.41
SMBIOS Revision : 7.31
Management Processor Revision : 7.41

WARNING AND STOP BOOT INFORMATION


Warning [52] : A ROM revision is inconsistant with FIT or REVBLOCK

CHIP REVISION INFORMATION :


CHIP Logical Device Chip
Type ID ID Revision
------------- ------- ------- ---------
Memory Controller 0 122b 0022
Root Bridge 0 1229 0022
Host Bridge 0000 122e 0022
Host Bridge 0001 122e 0022
Host Bridge 0002 122e 0022
Host Bridge 0003 122e 0022
Host Bridge 0004 122e 0022
Hot Plug Controller 0 0 0110
Host Bridge 0005 122e 0022
Host Bridge 0006 122e 0022
Hot Plug Controller 0 0 0110
Host Bridge 7 0 0110
Hot Plug Controller 0 0 0110
Other Bridge 0 0 0002
Other Bridge 0 0 0007
Baseboard MC 0 0 0130

Example 5-10 info cpu Command


Shell> info cpu
PROCESSOR INFORMATION

# of L3 L4 Family/
CPU Logical Cache Cache Model Processor

Slot CPUs Speed Size Size (hex.) Rev State


--- ------- --------- ------ ------ ------- ---- ------------
0 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F/01 B2 Active
1 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F/01 B2 Active
2 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F/01 B2 Sched Deconf
3 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F/01 B2 Active

Example 5-11 info mem Command


Shell> info mem
MEMORY INFORMATION
Extender 0:
--- DIMM A ----- ---- DIMM B ----- ----DIMM C ----- ---- DIMM D -----
DIMM Current DIMM Current DIMM Current DIMM Current
--- ------ ---------- ------ ----------- ------ ---------- ----- -------------
0 256 MB Active 256 MB Active 256 MB Active 256 MB Active
1 ---- ---- ---- ----
2 ---- ---- ---- ----
3 ---- ---- ---- ----
4 ---- ---- ---- ----
5 ---- ---- ---- ----
Extender 1:
--- DIMM A ----- ---- DIMM B ----- ----DIMM C ----- ---- DIMM D -----
DIMM Current DIMM Current DIMM Current DIMM Current

98 Chapter 5
Utilities
EFI/POSSE Commands

--- ------ ---------- ------ ----------- ------ ---------- ----- -------------


0 256 MB Active 256 MB Active 256 MB Active 256 MB Active
1 ---- ---- ---- ----
2 ---- ---- ---- ----
3 ---- ---- ---- ----
4 ---- ---- ---- ----
5 ---- ---- ---- ----

Active Memory : 1024 MB


Installed Memory : 1024 MB

Example 5-12 info io Command


Shell> info io
BOOTABLE DEVICES
Order Media Type Path
----- ---------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 HARDDRIVE Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(2|0)/Scsi(Pun0,Lun0)/HD(Part1,
Sig3D1F186A-846F-11D1-8780-FB49BB94A768)
2 HARDDRIVE Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(2|0)/Scsi(Pun2,Lun0)/HD(Part1,Sig9659000)
3 CDROM Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(2|1)/Scsi(Pun4,Lun0)/CDROM(Entry0)
4 HARDDRIVE Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Pci(1|1)/Scsi(Pun2,Lun0)/HD(Part1,
SigA45AC380-2588-11D6-B48C-806D6172696F)
5 HARDDRIVE Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Pci(1|1)/Scsi(Pun2,Lun0)/HD(Part1,
Sig9C82CD80-70D2-4E88-A374-B029EBF1D8E4)

Seg Bus Dev Fnc Vendor Device Slot


# # # # ID ID # Path
--- --- --- --- -------- ------- --- ----------
00 00 01 00 0x103C 0x1290 01 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(1|0)
00 00 01 01 0x103C 0x1048 01 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(1|1)
00 00 02 00 0x1000 0x000B 01 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(2|0)
00 00 02 01 0x1000 0x000B 01 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(2|1)
00 00 04 00 0x1011 0x0026 02 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(4|0)
00 01 04 00 0x1033 0x0035 02 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(4|0)/Pci(4|0)
00 01 04 01 0x1033 0x0035 02 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(4|0)/Pci(4|1)
00 01 04 02 0x1033 0x00E0 02 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(4|0)/Pci(4|2)
00 01 05 00 0x1002 0x5159 02 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(4|0)/Pci(5|0)
00 20 01 00 0x1014 0x01A7 03 Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(1|0)
00 21 01 00 0x1000 0x0021 03 Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Pci(1|0)
00 21 01 01 0x1000 0x0021 03 Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|1)/Pci(1|1)
00 21 04 00 0x14E4 0x1645 03 Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Pci(4|0)

Example 5-13 info boot Command


Shell> info boot
BOOT INFORMATION
Monarch CPU:

Current Preferred
Monarch Monarch Possible Warnings
-------- --------- ------------------
0 0

AutoBoot: on - Timeout is : 7 SEC


Boottest:
boottest Settings Default Variable
OS is not speedy boot aware.

Selftest Setting
---------- --------------
early_cpu Skip this test
late_cpu Run this test
platform Run this test

Chapter 5 99
Utilities
EFI/POSSE Commands

chipset Run this test


io_hw Run this test
mem_init Run this test
mem_test Run this test

LAN AddressInformation:

LAN Address Path


------------------- --------------
*Mac(00306E05B950) Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Pci(4|0)/Mac(00306E05B950B)

lanaddress
Allows the user to display the core I/O MAC address.

Syntax:
lanaddress

Parameters
none

Example 5-14 lanaddress Command


Shell> lanaddress

LAN Address Information


LAN ADDRESS Path
------------------ --------------------------
*Mac(00306E05B950) Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)/Pci(4|0)/Mac(00306E05B950)

monarch
Displays or modifies the ID of the bootstrap processor. The preferred monarch number is stored in NVM.

Syntax
monarch <cpu>

Parameters
<cpu> specifies a cpu

Operation
If specified with no parameters, monarch displays the Monarch processor for the system. Specifying a processor number
alters the preferred Monarch processor. None of these changes takes affect until after a reboot.

Example 5-15 monarch Command


Shell> monarch
Current Preferred
Monarch Monarch Possible Warnings
------- --------- -----------------
0 0
0 0

To view monarch: fs0 :\ monarch

100 Chapter 5
Utilities
EFI/POSSE Commands

| Processor
-----------------+-----------
current status | 0
next boot status | 0

To set the monarch processor to 1: fs0 :\ monarch 1

| Processor
-----------------+-----------
current status | 0
next boot status | 1

pdt
Displays or clears the contents of the Page Deallocation Table.

Syntax
pdt (clear)

Parameters
<clear> clears the pdt

Operation
With no options specified, the command displays the PDT information for the system. The PDT is cleared and a reboot is
required for memory reallocation and safe booting.

Example 5-16 pdt Command


Shell> pdt
PDT Information
Last Clear time: PDT has not been cleared
Number of total entries in PDT: 50
Number of used entries in PDT: 0
Number of free entries in PDT: 50
Number of single-bit entries in PDT: 0
Number of multi-bit entries in PDT: 0
Address of first multi-bit error: x0000000000000000

Example 5-17 pdt clear Command


Shell> pdt clear
Are you sure you want to clear the PDT? [y/N] y
Shell>

Shell> pdt
PDT Information

Last Clear time: 10/21/01 5:00p


Number of total entries in PDT: 50
Number of used entries in PDT: 0
Number of free entries in PDT: 50
Number of single-bit entries in PDT: 0
Number of multi-bit entries in PDT: 0
Address of first multi-bit error: 0x0000000000000000

sysmode
Display or modify the system mode.

Chapter 5 101
Utilities
EFI/POSSE Commands

Syntax
sysmode <normal | admin| service>

Parameters
<normal> sets system mode to normal

<admin> sets system mode to admin

<service> sets system mode to service

Operation
If specified alone, sysmode displays the system mode. If a mode is specified as a parameter, then the system mode is changed.
This new mode takes effect immediately. The system mode is retained on successive boots. Interaction with sysmode in a
variety of scenarios is outlined below.

Example 5-18 sysmode Command


Shell> sysmode
System Mode: NORMAL

Shell> sysmode admin


You are now in admin mode.

Shell> sysmode service


You are now in service mode.

Shell> sysmode normal


You are now in normal mode

102 Chapter 5
Utilities
Specifying SCSI Parameters

Specifying SCSI Parameters


The following SCSI parameters may be configured for the SCSI board:

• SCSI ID (SCSI initiator ID)


• Maximum data transfer rate (SCSI rate)
• Bus width
• Whether the HBA is bootable (driver support)
• Avoid bus resets (secondary cluster server)

Using the SCSI Setup Utility


Step 1. At the EFI shell prompt, type this command to map the parameters for all PCI cards installed in the system:

info io

A list of all the devices that are installed in the hp Integrity rx4640 Server and managed by EFI drivers is
displayed. The output may look like this:
Seg Bus Dev Fnc Vendor Device Slot
# # # # ID ID # Path
--- --- --- --- ------ ------ --- -----------
00 20 02 00 0x14E4 0x1645 XX Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(2|0)
00 00 01 00 0x1033 0x0035 XX Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(1|0)
00 00 01 01 0x1033 0x0035 XX Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(1|1)
00 00 01 02 0x1033 0x00E0 XX Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(1|2)
00 00 02 00 0x1095 0x0649 XX Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(2|0)
00 00 03 00 0x8086 0x1229 XX Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(3|0)
00 20 01 00 0x1000 0x0030 XX Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)
00 20 01 01 0x1000 0x0030 XX Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|1)
00 40 01 00 0x1000 0x0021 03 Acpi(HWP0002,200)/Pci(1|0)
00 40 01 01 0x1000 0x0021 03 Acpi(HWP0002,200)/Pci(1|1)
00 60 01 00 0x1000 0x0021 02 Acpi(HWP0002,300)/Pci(1|0)
00 60 01 01 0x1000 0x0021 02 Acpi(HWP0002,300)/Pci(1|1)
00 80 01 00 0x8086 0x1229 01 Acpi(HWP0002,400)/Pci(1|0)
00 C0 01 00 0x1000 0x0021 04 Acpi(HWP0002,600)/Pci(1|0)
00 E0 01 00 0x103C 0x1290 XX Acpi(HWP0002,700)/Pci(1|0)
00 E0 01 01 0x103C 0x1048 XX Acpi(HWP0002,700)/Pci(1|1)
00 E0 02 00 0x1002 0x5159 XX Acpi(HWP0002,700)/Pci(2|0)

In the example above, two SCSI boards are in the listing. The information for both channels of both SCSI boards is
shown in bold, for highlighting purposes.

For each channel of the SCSI board, you need to note certain information. As an example, look at the information
for the first SCSI board (the first two bold lines). For each channel of this SCSI board, note the following
information:

• Bus #—identifies the bus the device is on; for the SCSI board, this is the same for both channels. In this
example, the bus number is 40.

• Dev #—the ID the device is assigned on the bus; for the SCSI board, this is the same for both channels. In
this example, the SCSI board is device 01.

• Fnc #—identifies the channel of the device (00 for channel A, 01 for channel B, and so on). In this example,
because the SCSI board has two channels, one channel is 00 and the other is 01.

Chapter 5 103
Utilities
Specifying SCSI Parameters

• Vendor ID—shows the device’s vendor ID; for the SCSI board, this is the same for both channels. For all
SCSI board HBAs, the ID is 0x1000.

• Device ID—shows the device’s device ID; for the SCSI board, this is the same for both channels. For all
SCSI board HBAs, the ID is 0x0021.

• Slot #—identifies the physical card slot in the system where the HBA is installed; for the SCSI board, this is
the same for both channels. In this example, the HBA is in slot 03.

• Path—identifies the device’s path; for the SCSI board, this is the same for both channels. In this example, the
HBA’s path is Acpi(HWP0002,200)/Pci(1|0) for channel A and Acpi(HWP0002,200)/Pci(1|1) for
channel B.

Using the SCSI board’s information from the example above, the pieces of information that, combined, tell you
this is a SCSI board are the following (shown in bold, for highlighting purposes):
00 40 01 00 0x1000 0x0021 03 Acpi(HWP0002,200)/Pci(1|0)
00 40 01 01 0x1000 0x0021 03 Acpi(HWP0002,200)/Pci(1|1)

Looking at all of the above information together, the vendor (0x1000) and device (0x0021) are the IDs for a SCSI
board. Of the devices with those IDs, this device has two channels (Fnc # of 00 immediately followed by Fnc # of
01). Also, this SCSI board has a numeric (non-XX) slot # (03, in this example).

Step 2. Still at the EFI shell prompt, type this command to obtain the controller’s handle for the SCSI card:

devtree

A tree of all EFI-capable devices installed in the system is displayed. The output could look like this:
Device Tree
Ctrl[02]
Ctrl[04] Acpi(HWP0002,0)
Ctrl[76] Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(1|0)
Ctrl[77] Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(1|1)
Ctrl[78] Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(1|2)
Ctrl[79] Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(2|0)
Ctrl[7B] Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(2|0)/Ata(Primary,Master)
Ctrl[7A] Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(3|0)
Ctrl[7C] Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(3|0)/Mac(00306E1ECE06)
Ctrl[05] Acpi(HWP0002,100)
Ctrl[32] Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(2|0)
Ctrl[33] Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(2|0)/Mac(00306E1E9EFA)
Ctrl[7D] LSI Logic Ultra320 SCSI Controller
Ctrl[7E] LSI Logic Ultra320 SCSI Controller
Ctrl[06] Acpi(HWP0002,200)
Ctrl[82] LSI Logic Ultra160 SCSI Controller
Ctrl[83] LSI Logic Ultra160 SCSI Controller
Ctrl[07] Acpi(HWP0002,300)
Ctrl[91] LSI Logic Ultra160 SCSI Controller
Ctrl[92] LSI Logic Ultra160 SCSI Controller
Ctrl[08] Acpi(HWP0002,400)
Ctrl[93] Acpi(HWP0002,400)/Pci(1|0)
Ctrl[94] Acpi(HWP0002,400)/Pci(1|0)/Mac(0002B35BE064)
Ctrl[09] Acpi(HWP0002,600)
Ctrl[95] LSI Logic Ultra160 SCSI Controller
Ctrl[0A] Acpi(HWP0002,700)
Ctrl[96] Acpi(HWP0002,700)/Pci(1|0)
Ctrl[97] Acpi(HWP0002,700)/Pci(1|1)
Ctrl[98] Acpi(HWP0002,700)/Pci(2|0)

104 Chapter 5
Utilities
Specifying SCSI Parameters

In the above example, this SCSI board’s information is shown in bold, for highlighting purposes. You can tell the
information is for this SCSI board because the path on the first line—Acpi(HWP0002,200)— is the HBA’s path
from the information displayed by the info io command. The next two lines are for the SCSI board’s two channels,
one line for each channel (they contain the SCSI board’s description [LSI Logic Ultra160 SCSI Controller]). Note the
value shown for Ctrl—82 and 83—at the beginning of each of those lines; this is the controller’s handle for that
channel. You need to know it for the next step.

NOTE The controller’s handle values will change on every boot.

Step 3. Still at the EFI shell prompt, type this command to obtain the EFI driver’s handle for the SCSI card:

drvcfg

A list of all EFI-capable configurable components in the system is displayed. The output may look like this:
Drv[26] Ctrl[79] Lang[eng]
Drv[34] Ctrl[83] Lang[eng]
Drv[35] Ctrl[82] Lang[eng]
Drv[36] Ctrl[92] Lang[eng]
Drv[37] Ctrl[91] Lang[eng]
Drv[38] Ctrl[95] Lang[eng]
Drv[71] Ctrl[7D] Lang[eng]
Drv[71] Ctrl[7E] Lang[eng]

This listing shows which driver controls which device (controller). In the above example, this SCSI board’s
information is shown in bold, for highlighting purposes. You can tell the information is for this SCSI board
because the values shown for Ctrl—82 and 83—are the controller’s handles for the SCSI board’s two channels
(from the information displayed by the devtree command).

NOTE The EFI driver’s handle values will change on every boot.

TIP From this command (drvcfg), we recommend you record these two pieces of information for
each channel of each SCSI board HBA you want to change the SCSI parameters for:

• Drv (the EFI driver’s handle)

• Ctrl (the controller’s handle)

Step 4. Using the information (the driver’s handle [Drv] and the controller’s handle [Ctrl]) from the drvcfg command,
start the EFI SCSI Setup Utility for one channel of this SCSI board. Still at the EFI shell prompt, type this
command:

drvcfg -s drvr_handle cntrl_handle

where

• drvr_handle is the handle of the driver that controls the channel whose SCSI ID you want to display or
change

• cntrl_handle is the handle of the controller for the channel whose SCSI ID you want to display or change

So, continuing the example for channel A of this SCSI board, you would type:

drvcfg -s 35 82

Chapter 5 105
Utilities
Specifying SCSI Parameters

Step 5. The EFI SCSI Setup Utility starts and its main menu is displayed, showing a list of all the EFI capable HBAs in the
system.

TIP To move the cursor in the EFI SCSI Setup Utility, you can use these keys:

• Arrow keys: ↑ ↓ ← →

• Alternate keys:

H = left

J = down

K = up

L = right

I = home

O = end

Move the cursor to highlight this channel of this SCSI board; press Enter. (To determine which channel of the
HBA to highlight, match the PCI Bus, PCI Dev, and PCI Func values on this screen to the Bus #, Dev #, and
Fnc # values from the info io command.)

CAUTION Do not select the <Global Properties> option on the main menu.

Step 6. The “Adapter Properties” screen for this channel of this SCSI board is displayed. If you like, you can make sure
the utility is running for this channel of this SCSI board by comparing the values shown for PCI Bus,
PCI Device, and PCI Function to the Bus #, Dev #, and Fnc # values from the info io command.

CAUTION Do not change the value for any of these fields on the “Adapter Properties” screen:

• Auto Termination

• SCSI Parity

• SCSI Bus Scan Order

• Spinup Delay (Secs)

Changing any of these fields can cause unpredictable results.

CAUTION Do not change the value for any of these fields on the “Device Properties” screen:

• Scan Id

• Scan LUNs > 0

• Disconnect

• SCSI Timeout

• Queue Tags

106 Chapter 5
Utilities
Specifying SCSI Parameters

• Format

• Verify

Changing any of these fields can cause unpredictable results.

Step 7. You may display (and optionally change) any SCSI parameters listed below for this channel of this SCSI board, or
restore its SCSI parameters to their default values.

• SCSI ID

• Maximum data transfer rate

• Bus width

• Whether the HBA is bootable (driver support)

• Avoid bus resets (secondary cluster server)

• Restore Defaults

Step 8. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the appropriate SCSI parameter.

Step 9. Use the plus (+) and minus (-) keys to scroll through the values until the value you want is displayed.

Step 10. Press Esc to exit the “Adapter Properties” screen. You are given these choices:

• Cancel the exit from the screen (to stay in the “Adapter Properties” screen for this channel of this SCSI board)

• Save the changes you made and then exit the screen

• Discard the changes you made and then exit the screen

Step 11. Move the cursor to the action (cancel, save, or discard) you want to take; press Enter.

If you selected cancel, you remain in the “Adapter Properties” screen for this channel of this SCSI board. You can
still change this channel’s parameters listed above.

If you selected save or discard, you are placed in the EFI SCSI Setup Utility’s main menu.

CAUTION Do not select the <Global Properties> option on the main menu.

Step 12. Press Esc to exit the main menu and the EFI SCSI Setup Utility.

Step 13. Select the option for exiting the utility.

Step 14. When you are prompted to, press Enter to stop this SCSI board; you are now back at the EFI shell prompt.

Step 15. At the EFI shell prompt, type this command:

reset

The system starts to reboot. This is required to cause the new SCSI setting.

Chapter 5 107
Utilities
Management Processor

Management Processor
The management processor is an independent support system for the server. It provides a way for you to connect to a server
and perform administration or monitoring tasks for the server hardware.
The management processor controls power, reset, Transfer of Control (TOC) capabilities, provides console access, displays
and records system events, and can display detailed information about the various internal subsystems. The management
processor also provides a virtual front panel that can be used to monitor system status and see the state of front panel LEDs.
All MP functions are available via the LAN, local RS-232 and remote RS-232 ports.
The management processor is available whenever the system is connected to a power source, even if the server main power
switch is in the off position.
Access to the management processor can be restricted by user accounts. User accounts are password protected and provide a
specific level of access to the server and management processor commands.
Multiple users can interact with the management processor. From the MP Main Menu users can select any of the following
options: enter management processor command mode, enter console, view event logs, view console history, display virtual
front panel, enter console session, or connect to another management processor. Multiple users can select different options
from the MP Main Menu at the same time. However, management processor command mode and console mode are mirrored,
The MP allows only one user at a time to have write access to the shared console.

Accessing the Management Processor


You can connect to the management processor using the following methods:

• The local RS-232C port using a local terminal


• The remote RS-232C port using external modem (dial-up) access, if remote modem access is configured
• The management processor LAN port using Web Console or telnet if login access through the management processor
LAN is enabled

Interacting with the Management Processor


To interact with the management processor, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Log in using your management processor user account name and password.

NOTE If the management processor is not displaying the MP Main Menu, use CTRL+B to access the MP
Main Menu and the management processor (MP) prompt.

Step 2. Use the management processor menus and commands as needed. A list of available commands can be displayed
by using the management processor help function (in the MP Main Menu, enter HE followed by LI at the MP
HELP: prompt). Log out using the X command (in the MP Main Menu, enter X at the MP> prompt) when done.

108 Chapter 5
Utilities
Management Processor Command Interface

Management Processor Command Interface


Use the management processor menus and commands as needed. The login screen, which includes the Main Menu, is shown
below. Main Menu commands (CO, VFP, CM, CL, CSP, SE, SL, HE, and X) can be entered after the MP prompt. Commands not
displayed in the MP Main Menu can be accessed in command mode by first using the CM command at the MP prompt. (A list of
available commands can be displayed by using the management processor help function. Display the list of commands as
follows: in the MP Main Menu, enter HE after the MP> prompt, then enter LI after the MP HELP: prompt.) You can return to
the MP Main Menu by typing CTRL+B.

Figure 5-2 MP Welcome Screen

MP Login: Admin
MP password: *****
Hewlett-Packard Management Processor
(C) Copyright Hewlett-Packard Company 1999-2003. All rights reserved
System Name: xxxxxxxxx

MP MAIN MENU:
CO:Console
VFP:Virtual Front Panel
CM:Command Menu
CL:Console Log
SL:Show Event Logs
CSP:Connect to Service Processor

MP commands are described in the following paragraphs.

Chapter 5 109
Utilities
Management Processor Command Interface

Management Processor Commands


Table 5-3 Management Processor Commands and Descriptions

Command Description

BP Reset BMC passwords

CA Configure asynch/serial ports

CG Certificate generator

CL View console log

CM Select command mode

Ctrl+B Return to MP main menu

CO Select console mode

CSP Connect to service processor

DATE Date display

DC Default configuration

DF Display FRU information

DI Disconnect remote or LAN console

FW Upgrade MP firmware

HE Display help for menu or command

ID System information

IT Inactivity timeout settings

LC LAN configuration

LOC Locator LED display and configuration

LS LAN Status

MR Modem reset

MS Modem status

PC Remote power control

PG Paging parameter setup

PS Power management module status

RB Reset BMC

RS Reset system through RST signal

SA Set access

SE Enter OS session

SL Show event logs

110 Chapter 5
Utilities
Management Processor Command Interface

Table 5-3 Management Processor Commands and Descriptions (Continued)

Command Description

SO Security options

SS System processor status

SYSREV Current system firmware revisions

TC Reset via transfer of control (TOC)

TE Tell- send a message to other users

UC User configuration

VFP Virtual front panel

WHO Display connected management processor users

X Exit management processor and disconnect

XD Diagnostics and/or reset of management processor

Reset BMC Passwords


BP: Reset BMC Passwords
This command resets BMC passwords (both USER and ADMIN passwords).

Configure Serial Port Parameters


CA: Configure local and remote serial port parameters
Set up the local serial port parameters as follows:

• TERMINAL TYPE: Vt100 vs HPterm


• BAUD RATES: Input and output data rates are the same; 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 38400, 115200 bit/sec.
• FLOW CONTROL: Hardware uses RTS/CTS; Software uses Xon/Xoff.
• TRANSMIT CONFIGURATION STRINGS: Disable this setting whenever the modem being used is not compatible with
the supported modem (MT5634ZBA).

IMPORTANT Do not mix HP and vt100 terminal types at the same time.

Set up the remote serial port parameters as follows:

• MODEM PROTOCOL: Bell or CCITT (CCITT is a European standard; RTS/CTS signaling is used, as well as the Ring
signal. Bell is a U.S. or simple mode).
• BAUD RATES: Input and output data rates are the same; 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 38400, 115200 bit/sec.
• FLOW CONTROL: Hardware uses RTS/CTS; Software uses Xon/Xoff.
• TRANSMIT CONFIGURATION STRINGS: Disable this setting whenever the modem being used is not compatible with
the supported modem (MT5634ZBA).
• MODEM PRESENCE: When the modem may not always be connected, set this parameter to “not always connected”.

Chapter 5 111
Utilities
Management Processor Command Interface

For example: A modem attached through a switch. In mode “not always connected,” no dial-out functions are allowed:
DIAL-BACK is disabled, and PAGING is not possible.
The MP mirrors the system console to the MP local, remote/modem, and LAN ports. One console output stream is reflected to
all of the connected console users. If several different terminal types are used simultaneously by the users, some users may see
strange results.

Example 5-19 HP-UX


Applications that care about the terminal type (install, SAM, vi, and so on) running on HP-UX use three methods to determine
the terminal type:

1. The application takes the terminal information from the OS. This value is set in the CA command and takes effect for all
MP ports.
2. The $TERM shell environment variable.
3. The application directly queries the terminal (in this case, the write enabled terminal establishes the terminal type).
Make sure that settings #1 and #2 agree with your terminal type.

Certificate Generate
CG: Generate RSA key pair or Self Signed Certificate
This command generates a new RSA key pair and self signed certificate.

Console Log
CL: Console Log—view the history of the Console output
This command displays up to 60 Kilobytes of logged console data (about 60 pages of display in text mode) sent from the
system to the Console path.

Command Mode
CM: Command Mode—enter command mode
This command switches the console terminal from the MP Main Menu to mirrored command interface mode. If the current
mux authority is administrator and the new login is as an operator, the command mux will be denied (remains in MP Main
Menu mode). If a command is in progress, a message will be displayed warning the new user of system status.

Console
CO: COnsole—leave command mode and enter console mode
This command switches the console terminal from the MP Main Menu to mirrored/redirected console mode. All mirrored data
is displayed. Type CTRL+B to return to the MP command interface.
For VT100 and HPTERM, verify that the MP setting in the CA command is correct and all mirrored consoles are of the same
terminal type for proper operation.

Connect to Service Processor


CSP: Connect to remote management processor over the LAN

112 Chapter 5
Utilities
Management Processor Command Interface

This command allows the local or remote port user to connect over the MP LAN to another MP on the network. The user that
launches the command is given a private connection to the other MP over the LAN. To return to the original MP, type CTRL+]
to disconnect the CSP session.

Date
DATE: Displays the current date, as generated in the MP real-time clock.

Default Configuration
DC: Default Configuration—reset all MP parameters to the default configuration
This command sets all MP parameters back to their default values. The user may reset all or a subset of the following
parameters:

• IP configurations
• Modem configuration
• Paging configuration
• Command Interface configuration
• Disable remote access, security configuration
• Session configuration. For example: setting the security configuration to default erases all users and passwords.
There are three ways to reset passwords in the MP:

1. In the SO command, change individual users.


2. In the DC command choose “Reset Security Configuration”.
3. Forgotten passwords can be reset by pressing the reset button on the back panel of your HP Server. See Figure 2-7 on
page 22. After the MP reboots, the local console terminal displays a message for five seconds. Responding to this message
in time will allow a local user to reset the passwords.
Notice that all user information (logins, passwords, and so on) is erased in methods 2 and 3.

Display FRUID
DF: Display FRUID information
This command displays FRUID information from the BMC for FRU devices. Information provided includes serial number;
part number; model designation; name and version number; and manufacturer.

Disconnect Remote or LAN Console


DI: DIsconnect remote/modem or LAN/WEB console
This command disconnects (hang up) the remote/modem or LAN/WEB users from MP. It does not disable the ports. The
remote console is no longer mirrored.

Front Panel Process


FP: Turn off front panel fault or attention LEDs
This command allows the user to control the state of front panel fault and attention LEDs, individually or together.

Chapter 5 113
Utilities
Management Processor Command Interface

MP Firmware Update
FW: Activates MP firmware upgrade mode
This command is available from either the LAN or local serial port. This command activates firmware upgrade mode, which
loads new firmware through the MP LAN by FTP (which must be operational). An MP Reset is generated after the upgrade is
complete.

Help
HE: Display help for menu or command
This command displays the MP hardware and firmware version identity, and the date and time of firmware generation. If
executed from the MP Main Menu, general information about the MP, and those commands displayed in the MP Main Menu,
will be displayed. If executed in command mode, this command displays a list of command interface commands available to
the user. It also displays detailed help information in response to a topic or command at the help prompt.

Display System ID
ID: Display/modify system information
This command allows the user to display and modify the following:

• SNMP contact information


• SNMP server information
• SPU hostname

Inactivity Timeout
IT: Inactivity Timeout settings
The session inactivity timeout is up to 1,440 minutes—default is 60 minutes. This timeout prevents sessions to the system
from being inadvertently left open. A session can be started by the SE command. An open session can prevent users from
logging onto the MP through a port and can also prevent system applications from initiating an outbound connection.
MP inactivity timeout is up to 1,440 minutes - default is 5 minutes. This timeout prevents a user from inadvertently keeping
the MP locked in a MP Command Interface mode preventing other users from looking at the console output. The MP
Command Interface inactivity. timeout may not be deactivated.
Flow control timeout is 0 to 60 minutes. If set to 0, no timeout is applied. This timeout prevents mirrored flow control from
blocking other ports when inactive.

Configure LAN Console


LC: LAN configuration (IP address, and so on)
This command displays and allows modification of the LAN configuration. Configurable parameters include:

• MP IP Address
• MP Host Name
• Subnet Mask
• Gateway Address
• Web Console port number

114 Chapter 5
Utilities
Management Processor Command Interface

• Link State
The MP Host Name set in this command is displayed at the MP command interface prompt. Typically the DNS name for the
LAN IP is entered.
This field can be programmed to any useful name or phrase. For clarity, it is useful to enter MP-on-SYSTEM as the MP Host
name, so both names show up in the prompt (limit 19 characters, no spaces allowed.) The web access port number is also set
by this command.

LAN Status
LS: LAN Status
This command displays all parameters and the current status of the MP LAN connections. The LAN parameters are not
modified by the execution of this command.

Return to Main Menu


MA: Return to MP Main Menu
This command makes the MP return to the nonmirrored MP Main Menu. This is the same as executing CTRL+B.

Modem Reset
MR: Modem Reset
This command makes the MP send an AT Z command to the modem, which resets it. Any modem connections are lost. The
initialization results can be viewed via the MS command.

Modem Status
MS: Modem Status—Display modem status
The MS command displays the state of the modem lines connected to the remote/modem serial port. The display can be
updated by pressing Enter. The current state of the status signals DCD, CTS, DSR, RI and the last state of the control signals
DTR, RTS set by the firmware are displayed.

Power Control
PC: Power Control—turn system power on and off
For proper system shutdown, shutdown the OS before issuing this command or use the commands graceful shutdown option.
This command allows you to switch the system power on or off. the user can have the action take place immediately or after a
specified delay.
Notice this is roughly the equivalent to turning the system power off at the front panel switch. There is no signal sent to the OS
to bring the software down before power is turned off. To turn the system off properly. you must ensure that the OS is in the
proper shutdown state before issuing this command. Use the proper OS commands or use the graceful shutdown option of the
Remote Power Control command.

Configure Paging
PG: Paging parameter setup—configures pagers
This command allows the user to configure the pagers and set triggering events.
A string description of the triggering event will be sent with the page.

Chapter 5 115
Utilities
Management Processor Command Interface

Power Status
PS: Power status—display the status of the power management module
This command displays on the console the status of the power management module.

Reset BMC
RB: Reset BMC
This command resets the BMC by toggling a GPIO pin.

Reset System
RS: Reset system through RST signal

IMPORTANT Under normal operation, shut down the OS before issuing this command.

This command causes the system (except the MP) to be reset through the RST signal.
Execution of this command irrecoverably halts all system processing and I/O activity and restarts the computer system. The
effect of this command is very similar to cycling the system power. The OS is not notified, no dump is taken on the way down,
and so on.

Set Access
SA: Set access options—configures access for LAN and remote/modem ports
This command will disconnect modem, LAN, and web users if access is disabled.

Create Local Session


SE: Log into the system on local or remote port
Only valid from the local or remote/modem port, SE allows the user to leave the MP Command Interface and enter a system
session. Other mirrored MP users are placed in console mode. The session user returns to the mirrored MP session on exit.
The MP regularly checks the activity of the session, closes the connection with the system, and, if the timeout period has
elapsed, returns the port to mirroring. The timeout period is set with the IT command. On HP-UX, the SE command works on
the local and remote ports.
In HP-UX, use the System Administration Manager (SAM) to add modem device files for the session UARTS. The modem
type, CCITT or Bell must agree with the remote port settings for the remote session port and always be Bell mode for the local
session port.
If the system and the MP Command Interface local or remote ports have been configured with different port speeds, the baud
rate changes to the rate specified by the OS for the duration of the session.

Display Logs
SL: Display contents of the system status logs
This command displays the contents of the event logs that have been stored in nonvolatile memory.

• System Event Log (SEL)—High attention events and errors


• Forward progress—All events

116 Chapter 5
Utilities
Management Processor Command Interface

• Current boot log—All events between “start of boot” and “boot complete”
• Previous boot log—The events from the previous boot
Reading the system event log turns off the attention LED. Accessing this log is the only way to turn off the attention LED
when it is flashing and alerts have not been acknowledged at the alert display level.
Events are encoded data that provide system information to the user. Some well-known names for similar data would be
Chassis Codes or Post Codes. Events are produced by intelligent hardware modules, the OS, and system firmware. Use VFP to
view the live events. Use SL to view the event log.
Navigate within the logs as follows:

• + — View the next block (forward in time)


• - — View the previous block (backward in time)
• Enter (<CR>) — View the next block in the previously selected direction (forward or backward in time)
• D — Dump the entire log for capture or analysis
• F — First entry
• L — Last entry
• J — Jump to entry number __
• V — View mode configuration (text, keyword, hex)
• ? — Display this help menu
• Q — Quit
Table 5-4 defines alert (or severity) levels.
Table 5-4 Alert Levels

Severity Definition

0 Minor forward progress

1 Major forward progress

2 Informational

3 Warning

5 Critical

7 Fatal

Security Options
SO: Configure security options and access control (users, passwords, and so on)
This command modifies the security parameters of the MP, which include login timeouts and allowed password faults.
If configured, when you access the MP via the modem port, the MP hangs up and dials the user back. This does not work if
Modem Presence is set to not always connected with the CA command.
If the mode is single, the state is changed to disabled after the first login.
A disabled user’s login is not accepted.

Chapter 5 117
Utilities
Management Processor Command Interface

Firmware Revision Status


SYSREV: Displays the revision status of firmware in the system processors
This command displays the revision status of firmware in the system processors.

System Status
SS: Displays the status of the system processors
The SS command displays the status of the system processors and which processor is the monarch.

Transfer Of Control
TC: System reset through INIT or TOC (Transfer of Control) signal
Under normal operation, shut down the OS before issuing this command.
This command causes the system to be reset through the INIT (or TOC) signal. Execution of this command irrecoverably halts
all system processing and I/O activity and restarts the computer system. It is different from the RS command in that the
processors are signaled to dump state on the way down.

Tell
TE: TEll—sends a message to other terminals
Up to 80 characters can be typed in. The message is broadcast to the other mirrored clients. Users in a session or CSP are not
shown the message.

User Configuration
UC: User Configuration—controls user access
This command allows an administrator to add, modify, re-enable, or delete user logins. The administrator can also enable or
disable security warnings and change passwords.

Virtual Front Panel


VFP: Display Virtual Front Panel
When invoked, this command displays a current summary of system status, including the state of front panel LEDs.
There are two ways that the live display of events can be started:

1. Live Mode: Invoked from the VFP command at the MP prompt. To exit, type Q to quit the console.
2. Early Boot Mode: When the boot sequence for the system begins, the live VFP is invoked automatically. When boot
finishes, you are automatically switched to console mode.
The LWED state reflects the state of the front panel LEDs. When system power is off, the remote LED shows “off” even
thought remote access may be enabled with the EL or ER commands.

Who
WHO: Displays a list of MP connected users

118 Chapter 5
Utilities
Management Processor Command Interface

This command displays the login name and operating mode (Main Menu, command, and so on) of the connected console
client users, and the port on which they are connected. For the LAN and WEB console clients the remote IP address is also
displayed.
If the local console client user did not originate the MP command interface session, there is always one default user listed for
the local serial port: local user i. If the local console operator types CTRL+B, then the login name that the local operator used
is displayed instead.

Exit from MP
X: Exit from MP command interface and disconnect from the system
This command disconnects the executing user from the system. This command is available from the local port.

Diagnostics
XD: Diagnostics and/or Reset of MP
This command allows the user to perform some simple checks to confirm the MP's health and its connectivity status. The
following tests are available:

• MP Parameter Checksum

• Verify I2C connection (get BMC Device ID)


• LAN connectivity test using ping
• Modem self-tests
Also, the MP can be reset from this command. A MP reset can be safely performed without affecting the operation of the
server.

Management Processor Help System


The MP has a robust help system. To invoke MP HELP, enter he after the MP> prompt. The following is displayed:
HE

==== MP Help: Main Menu ============================================(Administrator)===

Hardware Revision a1 Firmware Revision E.02.20 May 30 2003,15:18:47

MP Help System

Use Ctrl-B to exit MP command interface and return to the main MP menu:

Enter a command at the help prompt:

OVerview : Launch the help overview

LIst : Show the list of MP commands

<COMMAND> : Enter the command name for help on individual command

TOPics : Show all MP Help topics and commands

HElp : Display this screen

Q : Quit help

Enter one of the commands described above: OV, LI, <command>, TOP, HE, Q

Chapter 5 119
Utilities
Management Processor Command Interface

120 Chapter 5
Utilities
Management Processor Command Interface

Chapter 5 121
Utilities
Management Processor Command Interface

122 Chapter 5
6 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Tips

WARNING Before removing a cover to service components that cannot be hot-swapped, always disconnect the AC
power cords and unplug telephone cables. Disconnect telephone cables to avoid exposure to shock
hazard from telephone ringing voltages. Disconnect the AC power cords to avoid exposure to high
energy levels that may cause burns when parts are short-circuited by metal objects such as tools or
jewelry.

CAUTION Do not operate the HP Server for more than 10 minutes with any cover (including power supplies and disk
drives) removed. Otherwise, damage to system components may result due to improper cooling airflow.
However, you can safely remove a cover while the HP Server is running to remove and replace PCI hot-plug
boards. For any other service activity requiring access to the system board or power distribution board,
power-down the HP Server and observe all safety precautions.

Troubleshooting Methodology
Step 1. This is the entry point to the troubleshooting process. Here, you pick from a set of symptoms, ranging from very
simple (System LED is blinking) to the most difficult Machine Check Abort (MCA) has occured. The following is
a list of symptom examples:

• System LED blinking

• System Alert present on console

• System will not power-up

• System will not boot

• Event/Error Message received

• Machine Check Abort (MCA)

Step 2. This step narrows down the observed problem to the specific troubleshooting procedure required. Here you isolate
the failure to a specific part of the server so that you can perform more detailed troubleshooting. For example:

• Problem-System LED blinking

— System Alert on console?

— Analyze the alert by using the system event log (SEL) to identify the last error logged by the baseboard
management controller. Use either the EFI shell command line interface (CLI) or the optional
management processor card is installed, use the MP commands to view the SEL.

Step 3. At this point you will have a good idea about which area of the system requires further analysis. For example, if
the symptom was “system will not power-up” then the initial troubleshooting procedure may have indicated a
problem with the DC power supply not coming up after the power switch was turned on.

Step 4. You have now reached the point where the failed Field Replaceable Unit (FRU or FRUs) have been identified and
need to be replaced. You must now perform the specific remove-and-replace verification steps.

Chapter 6 123
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Tips

NOTE If multiple FRUs are identified as part of the solution, a fix cannot be guaranteed unless all
identified failed FRUs are replaced.

Step 5. There may be specific recovery procedures you need to perform to finish the repair. For example, if the display
panel is replaced, you will need to restore customer-specific information.

124 Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Possible Problems

Possible Problems
This section contains example HP Server problems and their possible solutions.

The system will not power-up.


Step 1. Review the installation procedures for the server. SeeChapter 4, “Installing Additional Components and
Configuring.”

Step 2. Check all power connection cables.

Step 3. Verify that 200-240 VAC power is available at the AC power receptacle. Check the receptacle output with another
device.

Step 4. Check the power supply fans to see if they are operating. The fans will operate off the DC voltage generated by the
power supply.

Step 5. Check that the Power LED on Front Control Panel is illuminated. See“Front Control Panel LEDs” on page 128.

Step 6. Check all connections from the power supply to the power distribution module.

Step 7. Verify that all cables and modules are correctly connected. Especially check the display panel connection.

Step 8. If the system starts to power-on and then power-off, a voltage rail of the power supply may be out of specification.
The BMC monitors voltages and prevents power-on when power values are out of specification.

The system will not boot.


Step 1. Examine the front panel LEDs for warning or fault indications. The system LED will be flashing yellow with a
warning indication and flashing red with a fault indication. See “Front Control Panel LEDs” on page 128.

Step 2. Examine the QuickFind Diagnostic Panel for indications of specific warning or fault indications. The diagnostic
LEDs present patterns that categorize the source of the warning or fault. See “QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LEDs”
on page 130.

Step 3. Display and examine the system event log (SEL) and forward progress log (FPL) for further information relating
to warning or fault isolation.

Step 4. Review the firmware revisions of all firmware.

Step 5. Use the MP command to cycle the system power: pc off, pc on.

Step 6. Turn the server off, wait at least twenty seconds, then turn the server back on to see if the failure can be cleared.

Step 7. Check that all DIMMs are seated properly.

Step 8. Check that the DIMM configuration on the system board matches those approved. A minimum of one DIMM pair
must be installed.

Step 9. Verify that the DIMMs are fully seated. When the DIMM is fully seated in the mating connector, the retaining
latches are closed (they should be flush with the front of the DIMM). If the latches are not closed, reseat the DIMM
fully by engaging the retaining latches and closing them fully.

Step 10. Check that the processors are installed in the correct sockets and that each processor has a power pod installed.
Also verify that the processors are of the same type.

Chapter 6 125
Troubleshooting
Possible Problems

Step 11. Check the boot order with the SCSI configuration utility.

Step 12. If there are no obvious errors, reflash the BMC firmware, Refer to the Utilities chapter in the hp Integrity rx4640
Operations and Maintenance Guide.

Step 13. If the system will still not boot, it may be necessary to replace the base unit.

The system has intermittent failures


Step 1. Examine the front panel LEDs for warning or fault indications. The system LED will be flashing yellow with a
warning indication and flashing red with a fault indication. See “Front Control Panel LEDs” on page 128.

Step 2. Examine the QuickFind Diagnostic Panel for indications of specific warning or fault indications. The diagnostic
LEDs present patterns that categorize the source of the warning or fault. See “QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LEDs”
on page 130.

Step 3. Display and examine the system event log (SEL) and forward progress log (FPL) for further information relating
to warning or fault indications.

Step 4. Make sure that the system fan assemblies are fully seated.

Step 5. Verify that the server is plugged into a power source that is within specifications described on the label of the
power supply.

Step 6. Make sure that the internal SCSI chain is terminated and that termination is not enabled on any of the drives. Note
that LVD SCSI termination is provided on the cable.

Step 7. Check that the processors are installed in the correct sockets and that terminators are installed in all unused
sockets.

Step 8. Reset the main memory DIMMs.

Step 9. If date and time or customer settings are being cleared, the system board battery may need to be replaced.

The system LED or Diagnostic LEDs are not on and no error messages appear.
If the server does not work (with no LEDs illuminated) and no error messages appearing, check the following:

Step 1. Make sure that all cables and the AC power cord are plugged into their proper receptacles.

Step 2. Make sure that the AC outlet is working. If the server is plugged into a switched multiple-outlet box, make sure
that the switch on the outlet box is turned on.

Step 3. Make sure that the server is turned on (the power-on light should be green and the fans should be on).

Step 4. Turn the server off, wait at least twenty seconds, then turn the server back on to see if the failure can be cleared.

Step 5. Make sure that all boards are installed properly and the processors are installed in the correct slot. They must be
seated firmly in their slots and any cables must be connected firmly.

Step 6. If the server stopped working after you installed a new board, remove the board and turn on the server. If your
server now works, check the installation instructions received with the new board for correct installation method.
If the new board is preventing the server from powering on, it is likely to have a serious electrical problem.

Step 7. If the server still does not work, remove all boards and options that you have installed (do not remove the hard disk
drives) and turn on the server.

Step 8. Add boards and options one at a time to determine which one is causing the problem.

126 Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators

Step 9. If you have added any memory, make sure that the DIMMs are seated properly in the board. Also check the DIMM
configuration, and that the DIMMs are matched pairs.

Power goes off on the server and does not come back on
When certain critical conditions exist, the server shuts down all power.
The critical conditions that may shut down the server are:

• Critical temperature fluctuations or changes


• Voltage problems (external AC line)
• Power supply failure
If the server powers-off, and before you try a restart, do the following:

Step 1. Examine the front panel LEDs for warning or fault indications. The system LED will be flashing yellow with a
warning indication and flashing red with a fault indication. See “Front Control Panel LEDs” on page 128.

Step 2. Examine the QuickFind Diagnostic Panel for indications of specific warning or fault indications. The diagnostic
LEDs present patterns that categorize the source of the warning or fault. See “QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LEDs”
on page 130.

Step 3. Check to make sure power is getting to the server. Plug a known working device into the power outlet.

Step 4. Check for proper ventilation for the server. The server should have at least three inches of space around the front
and rear for proper airflow when installed in a rack.

NOTE Temperature problems may be caused by a fluctuating power supply.

Step 5. Check the system specifications and make sure the environmental temperature and voltage are in the specified
guidelines.

Step 6. Monitor the system to make sure you are not experiencing further temperature and voltage problems.

Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators


Your hp Integrity rx4640 Server has LED indicators located on the front control panel and an internal QuickFind diagnostic
panel that you can use to determine what repair action is required. For descriptions of all LEDs on your hp Integrity rx4640
Server see the hp Integrity rx4640 Operation and Maintenance Guide on the documentation CD included with your system.

Chapter 6 127
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators

Front Control Panel LEDs


The front control panel LEDs show you the system status at a glance. If warning or attention lights are flashing, then you
should to query the QuickFind diagnostic panel or management processor for further information.

Figure 6-1 Front Control Panel

System LED
Power LED
Power Button Disk LED
TOC/NMI Button Thermal LED

Locator
Button/LED

Table 6-1 Front Control Panel LED Definitions

LED/
State Flash Rate Color Description
Button

System Running Steady Green Green: System normal-OS up and running

System Booting Flashing at Green Flashing green: OS booting or at EFI


0.5Hz

System Attention Flashing at 1 Yellow Flashing yellow: warning-system needs attention.


Hz Redundancy lost, component failure pending.

System Fault Flashing at 2 Red Flashing red: hard fault, system halted
Hz

System Off Off N/A Off: system off

Power On Steady Green Green: power normal

Power On Steady Yellow Flashing yellow: Housekeeping voltage present

Power Off Off Off Off: Power off

Disk LED Flashing at Green Flashing green: disk activity


rate of disk
activity

Thermal LED OK Steady Green Green: thermal OK

Thermal LED Warning Flashing at 1 Yellow Flashing yellow-thermal warning


Hz

Locator Flashing at 1 Blue Flashing blue: system locator LED may be remotely
LED/Button Hz or locally activated/deactivated

128 Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators

QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LEDs


The QuickFind diagnostic panel is located under the top cover and is attached to the top of the power supply cage. The
following definitions describe the status of the various LEDs and what is wrong with the indicated component.
Table 6-2 QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LED Definitions

Item LED 0 LED 1 LED 2 LED3 Details

Processor Socket 0 Socket 1 Socket 2 Socket 3 If the System LED (on front panel) is in the
attention or fault state and the processor LED is on,
then the processor or voltage regulator has
failed—the processor module in the specified
socket needs to be replaced.

If the thermal LED is in the warning or critical


state and the processor LED is on, then the
processor exceeded the warning or critical level.

Subsystem CPU Memory I/O board n/a A soldered voltage regulator has failed—the
board board specified board must be replaced.

I/O VRM 12 volt 5 volt 3 volt n/a A plug-in voltage regulator has failed—specific
VRM must be replaced.

CPU VRM n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Fan Module 0 1 2 n/a One or both fans in a fan module have failed—the
module must be replaced.

Fan 2 is in front of the power supplies.

Memory Bank DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM The specified DIMM has failed—the DIMM must
X (0-7) xA xB xC xD be replaced.

If all the LEDs for a rank (0-7) are lit and the
memory config error LED is lit, then the DIMMs
in the specified rank are mismatched—replace
mismatched DIMM.

Check Power n/a n/a n/a One of the power supply or power supply fans
Supply have failed—replace the power supply. The faulty
power supply LED (located on Power supply) will
be lit.

Memory n/a n/a n/a The DIMMs in a rank are mismatched. All the
Config Error DIMMs in the specified rank (0-7) will be lit.

Processor n/a n/a n/a The processors are mismatched—replace


Config Error mismatched processor.

Missing n/a n/a n/a A required component(s) is not installed in the


Component system and thus preventing “power-up.”

System Temp n/a n/a n/a The internal temperature of the server has
exceeded the warning or critical level.

Chapter 6 129
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators

Table 6-2 QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LED Definitions (Continued)

Item LED 0 LED 1 LED 2 LED3 Details

Check Event n/a n/a n/a An event has occurred that requires attention.
Log

Figure 6-2 QuickFind Diagnostic Label

130 Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators

I/O Baseboard LED Indicators


Various LEDs, sensors, and reset or attention buttons are found on the I/O baseboard.

Figure 6-3 I/O Baseboard LEDs, Buttons and Sensors

Battery

3.3VSB
Power
LED

BMC
Reset
Button

12V VRM LED

PCI Attention
LED 6X

PCI Attention
Button (Doorbell)
5V VRM 6X
LED PCI Power LED
MP Soft 6X
Reset
Button
MP Heartbeat LED 3.3V VRM LED PCI Attention LED 6X
MP Self-Test BMC Heartbeat LED Locator Button/LED
LED

Table 6-3 I/O Baseboard LEDs, Buttons and Sensors

LED/Button Color Status Condition

12V VRM Power Green On 12V VRM is functioning.


LED

5V VRM Power LED Green On 5V VRM is functioning.

Chapter 6 131
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Online Support Tools

Table 6-3 I/O Baseboard LEDs, Buttons and Sensors (Continued)

LED/Button Color Status Condition

3.3V VRM Power Green On 3.3V VRM is functioning.


LED

MP Heartbeat Green Blinking The management processor is functioning correctly.

MP Self Test LED Amber On The management processor is executing the internal self
test.
Off
The management processor has passed the internal self
test.

BMC Heartbeat Green Blinking The baseboard management controller is functioning


correctly.

3.3VSB Power LED Green On Standby power is available.

MP Soft Reset Button N/A Press Resets the management processors values.

Troubleshooting Using Online Support Tools


The following online support tools are available from the HP-UX environment.

Support Tools Manager


Support Tools Manager (STM) is available in three user interfaces:

• Graphical interface for X-based terminals (XSTM)


• Menu interface for ASCII terminals (MSTM)
• Command line interface for all ASCII terminals (CSTM)
You can use the graphical and menu interfaces intuitively and you can use the command line interface to drive STM using
scripts.
You can use diagnostics to thoroughly test a device and isolate failures down to the suspected Field Replaceable Unit (FRU).
To access the Support Tools Manager from a terminal console, perform the following steps:

Step 1. In a terminal window type the following at the command prompt:


fs0:\> cstm

The following message appears:


Support Tools Manager Version A.01.00

Type ‘help’ for a list of available commands

CSTM>

Step 2. To verify the system operation, type the following at the CSTM> prompt:

132 Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Online Support Tools

CSTM> verify all

Messages similar to the following appear:


Verification has started on device (CPU)

Verification has started on device (FPU)

CSTM> Verification of (FPU) has completed)

CSTM> Verification of (CPU) has completed)

Step 3. Press Enter to return to CSTM> prompt after all test results are reported.

Step 4. To exit the Support Tools Manager, type the following:


CSTM> exit

Event Monitoring Service


Event Monitoring Service (EMS) is the framework for monitoring hardware and reporting events. You can use EMS to
eliminate most undetected hardware failures that cause data loss or interruptions of system operation. You can monitor a
hardware device (such as a disk) for the occurrence of any unusual activity (called an event). When an event occurs, it is
reported by a variety of notification methods such as e-mail. Event detections are handled automatically with minimal
involvement on your part.
The following monitors are available:

• IA-64 core hardware monitor


• CMC monitor
• UPS monitor
• FC hub monitor
• FC switch monitor
• Peripheral status monitor
• Memory monitor
EMS comes with your HP-UX operating system. To bring up the event monitoring main menu, execute the following
command at the shell prompt:
/etc/opt/resmon/lbin/monconfig

From the list of main menu selections, choose:


(E) Enable Monitoring

Instant Support Enterprise Edition (ISEE)


ISEE is a remote monitoring software package that can operate on your hp Integrity rx4640. It can deliver, via the Internet,
remote system monitoring and secure remote access from your machine to HP support engineers. It places a MAP (script) on
your machine that can be turned on by HP support to gather system information. This software can be obtained at
http://www.software.hp.com.

Chapter 6 133
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools

Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools


You can use offline support tools to troubleshoot your hp Integrity rx4640 Server.

• Offline Diagnostic Environment (ODE)—available on IPF Offline Diagnostics on the resource CD that comes with your
HP Server.
• e-Diagtools—available from IPF Offline Diagnostics on the resource CD that comes with your server.

NOTE For machines using HP-UX the HP service partition is not available and the IPF Offline Diagnostics CD
must be used.

• Management Processor (MP) event logs—available by logging on to the management processor via the MP LAN or MP
remote serial connectors.

Offline Diagnostic Environment (ODE)


ODE is used to evaluate specific hardware components via a command line interface. To access ODE from the IPF Offline
Diagnostics CD, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Power on your HP Server and insert the IPF Offline Diagnostics CD.

Step 2. Do not permit the server to boot into an operating system and at the EFI boot manager, select EFI shell.

Step 3. Determine the file system that represents the CD and enter the appropriate command to access the CD.

e-Diagtools
e-Diagtools is used to evaluate the hardware integrity of your HP Server. To access e-Diagtools from the IPF Offline
Diagnostics CD, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Power on your HP Server and insert the IPF Offline Diagnostics CD.

Step 2. Do not permit the server to boot into an operating system and at the EFI boot manager, select EFI shell.

Step 3. Determine the file system that represents the CD and enter the appropriate command to access the CD.

Step 4. After accessing the CD diagnostic menu, launch e-Diagtools for IPF and run the basic and advanced tests
according to the menus.

Figure 6-4 Offline Diagnostic Main Menu

***************************************************************************

****** ******

****** Offline Diagnostic Environment ******

****** ******

****** (C) Copyright Hewlett-Packard Co 1993-2003 ******

****** All Rights Reserved ******

****** ******

****** HP shall not be liable for any damages resulting from the ******

134 Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools

****** use of this program. ******

****** ******

****** TC Version B.00.10 ******

****** SysLib Version B.00.06 ******

****** Mapfile Version B.01.05 ******

****** ******

***************************************************************************

Type HELP for command information.

ODE> ls

Modules on this boot media are:

filename type size created description

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

CIODIAG2.EFI TM 642560 06/06/2003 Core IO diagnostic

CPUDIAG.EFI TM 737280 06/06/2003 Processor diagnostic

IODIAG.EFI TM 143872 06/06/2003 Runs selftests on I/O modules

MAPPER.EFI TM 1653248 06/06/2003 System mapping utility

MEMDIAG.EFI TM 263168 06/06/2003 Memory diagnostic

PERFVER.EFI TM 814592 06/06/2003 Runs ROM-based selftests on peripherals

PLUTODIAG.EFI TM 514560 06/06/2003 SBA/LBA diagnostic

COPYUTIL.EFI TM 1041920 06/06/2003 Disk-to-tape copy utility

DFDUTIL.EFI TM 850432 06/06/2003 Disk firmware download utility

FCFUPDATE.EFI TM 608256 06/06/2003 FW Update Utility for Fibre Channel

ODE>

Management Processor (MP) Event Logs


The MP interface provides diagnostic and configuration capabilities. To access your MP interface, perform the following
steps:

NOTE The MP interface must be accessed from a terminal console that is attached to the MP via the MP LAN or MP
remote serial connector.

Step 1. If necessary, press CTRL+B to access the MP interface.

Step 2. Log in with proper user name and password.

Step 3. Press cl to display the console logs. This log displays console history from oldest to newest.

Step 4. Press sl to display the system logs. The system logs consist of:

• System event

Chapter 6 135
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools

• Forward progress

• Current boot

• Previous boot

• Live events

• Clear SEL/FPL logs

Step 5. For a complete explanation of the management processor and all commands see Chapter 5, “Utilities.”

Disk and I/O Path Logging


Some failures result in I/O path logging. These paths help to indicate the source of the error and may be included in the error
message or logged into console or event logs. The following table describes the disk drive and PCI slot paths for your HP
Server.
Table 6-4 Disk and DVD Paths

Slot Path

Slot 1 Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)

Slot 2 Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|1)

DVD Acpi(HWP0002,0)/Pci(3|0)

Table 6-5 I/O Paths

I/O Slot Path

Slot 1 Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(2|0)

Slot 2 Acpi(HWP0002,100)/Pci(1|0)

Slot 3 Acpi(HWP0002,400)/Pci(2|0)

Slot 4 Acpi(HWP0002,400)/Pci(1|0)

Slot 5 Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(2|0)

Slot 6 Acpi(HWP0002,500)/Pci(1|0)

Slot 7 Acpi(HWP0002,200)/Pci(1|0)

Slot 8 Acpi(HWP0002,600)/Pci(1|0)

Other Event Logs and General Diagnostic Tools


This section describes other general diagnostic tools that will be provided for your HP Server and how to generate other event
logs for troubleshooting diagnosis.

• General diagnostic tools available to support your HP Server are:

— MCA analyzer
• Event logs not generated by the management processor include:

— Machine check abort log (MCA)

136 Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools

— Corrected machine check log (CMC)


— Corrected platform error log (CPE)
To access these logs type in at the shell>command line prompt:

errdump mca
errdump cmc
errdump cpe

Hypothetical Troubleshooting Scenario


The following describes a hypothetical troubleshooting scenario that might occur with your hp Integrity rx4640 Server.

1. This is the entry point to the troubleshooting process. Here, you pick from a set of symptoms, ranging from very simple
(System LED is blinking) to the most difficult (MCA has occurred). The following is a list of symptom examples:

• System LED blinking


• System will not power up
• System will not boot
• EMS event message received
• Machine check abort (MCA) occurred
2. This step narrows down the observed problem to the specific troubleshooting procedure required. Here, you isolate the
failure to a specific part of the machine so that you can perform more detailed troubleshooting. For example:

• Problem-System LED blinking


If the LED is the system alert on the control console, analyze the last error logged by the management processor.
3. At this point you will probably know which component of your HP Server needs attention. For example, if the symptom
was “System will not power up,” then the initial troubleshooting procedure may have led to a problem with the DC power
supplies (48V) not coming up after the power switch was turned on.
4. You have now reached the point where the failed Field Replaceable Unit (FRU or FRUs) have been identified and need to
be replaced. You must now perform the specific remove-and-replace and verification steps. See Chapter 7, “Removing
and Replacing Components,” for remove-and-replace procedures on all FRUs in your HP Server.

NOTE If multiple FRUs are identified as part of the solution, a fix cannot be guaranteed unless all identified
failed FRUs are replaced.

5. There may be specific recovery procedures you need to perform to finish the repair. For example, if the management
processor is replaced, you will need to restore customer-specific information such as user profiles, network IDs, and
passwords. See Chapter 4, “Installing Additional Components and Configuring,” for procedures on setting up your
management processor.

Chapter 6 137
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools

138 Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools

Chapter 6 139
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools

140 Chapter 6
7 Removing and Replacing Components

Safety Information
Follow the procedures listed below to ensure safe handling of components and to prevent harm to both you and the HP Server:

• Use an antistatic wrist strap and a grounding mat, such as those included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service
Grounding Kit (HP 9300-1155).
• Handle accessory boards and components by the edges only. Do not touch any metal-edge connectors or any electrical
components on accessory boards.
• Do not wear clothing subject to static charge build-up, such as wool or synthetic materials.

WARNING Hazardous voltages are present inside the HP Server. Always remove AC power from the server
and associated assemblies while working inside the unit. Serious injury may result if this warning is
not observed.

Service Tools Required


Service of this product may require one or more of the following tools:

• Electrically Conductive Field Service Kit (P/N 9300-1155)


• 1/4 inch Flat Blade Screwdriver
• ACX-15 torx Screwdriver

Accessing a Rack Mounted Server


The hp Integrity rx4640 Server is designed to be rack mounted. The following procedure explains how to gain access to your
hp Integrity rx4640 Server that is mounted in an approved rack. For rack installation instructions, review the document titled
Installation Guide, Mid-Weight Slide Kit, 5065-7291. This document can be accessed at: http://www.hp.com/racksolutions.

WARNING Ensure that all anti-tip features (front and rear anti-tip feet installed; adequate ballast properly placed;
and so on) are employed prior to extending the server.

Extend the Server from the Rack

NOTE Ensure that there is enough area (Approximately 1.5 meters [4.5 ft.]) to fully extend the server out the front
and work on it.

Chapter 7 141
Removing and Replacing Components
Accessing a Pedestal Mounted Server

To extend the server from the rack, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Remove the T-25 screws that fasten the server to the rack. See Figure 7-1, “Accessing 25MM Torx Screws.”

Step 2. Flip out the two pull handles at either end of the front bezel and slowly pull the unit forward by the handles. The
server is fully extended when the rail clips are locked in place. When fully extended, the front and top covers are
fully accessible.

Figure 7-1 Accessing 25MM Torx Screws

25MM Torx
screw 2X

Insert the Server into the Rack


To insert the server into the rack, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Press the rail clips on either side of the server inward and push the server into the rack until it stops.

Step 2. Replace the T-25 screws that fasten the server to the rack.

Accessing a Pedestal Mounted Server


The hp Integrity rx4640 Server is also designed to be pedestal mounted. You do not need to remove the pedestal from the HP
Server to gain access to internal components. The front bezel, front cover, and top cover may be removed with the pedestal
attached to the HP Server.

142 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Accessing a Pedestal Mounted Server

WARNING Ensure that the HP Server is properly grounded when performing remove-and-replace procedures. Use
an antistatic wrist strap and grounding mat similar to those found in the HP Electrically Conductive
Field Service Kit.

Figure 7-2 Pedestal Mounted hp Integrity rx4640 Server

Chapter 7 143
Removing and Replacing Components
Front Bezel

Front Bezel
The server does not have to be turned off to remove the front bezel.
Opening the control panel door provides access to the following components:

• Power switch
• System LEDs

Figure 7-3 Removing and Replacing the Front Bezel

Removing the Front Bezel


To remove the front bezel, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Grasp the front bezel at the outer edges and pull straight out.

Replacing the Front Bezel


To Replace the front bezel, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Push the front bezel straight into the chassis until it snaps into place.

144 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Front and Top Covers

Front and Top Covers

NOTE When the front or top cover is removed the chassis fan units increase to high speed to assist cooling. When the
top cover is replaced at the end of the operation, the chassis fans return to normal speed.

Figure 7-4 Removing and Replacing the Front Cover

Thumbscrews

Removing the Front Cover


To remove the front cover, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the front bezel. See “Front Bezel” on page 144.

Step 3. Using a torx T15 driver, loosen the four captive thumbscrews that hold the front cover in place.

Step 4. Raise the cover slightly, and pull the cover toward the front of the server to free the tabs from the slots in the center
of the chassis.

Chapter 7 145
Removing and Replacing Components
Front and Top Covers

Replacing the Front Cover


To replace the front cover, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Align the tabs at the rear of the front cover with the corresponding slots in the chassis and fully seat the tabs into
the slots.

Step 2. Tighten the four thumbscrews securely.

Step 3. Replace the front bezel.

146 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Front and Top Covers

Step 4. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server into the rack until it stops.

Figure 7-5 Removing and Replacing the Top Cover

Thumbscrews

Removing the Top Cover


To remove the top cover, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Chapter 7 147
Removing and Replacing Components
Front and Top Covers

Step 2. Loosen the two captive thumbscrews that hold the top cover in place.

Step 3. Pull the cover toward the rear of the server to free the tabs from the slots in the center of the chassis and lift it
straight up.

Replacing the Top Cover


To replace the top cover, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Align the tabs at the rear of the top cover with the corresponding slots in the chassis, fully seat the tabs into the
slots, and push forward until it seats.

Step 2. Using a torx T15 driver, tighten the two thumbscrews securely.

Step 3. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server into the rack until it stops.

148 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
System Battery

System Battery
The system battery may be replaced by removing the top cover and accessing the I/O baseboard.
To remove and replace the system battery, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the top cover from the chassis. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

Step 3. Remove the I/O baseboard assembly from the chassis. See “I/O Baseboard Assembly” on page 172.

Step 4. Locate the system battery on the I/O baseboard. Remove the battery by lifting the retaining clip and pull the battery
from its socket.

Step 5. Install the new battery and replace the retaining clip.

NOTE The positive terminal of the battery is designated by the “+” sign. The battery is installed with the “+” sign facing
up.

Step 6. Replace the top cover.

Step 7. Replace the I/O baseboard assembly.

Chapter 7 149
Removing and Replacing Components
System Battery

Step 8. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server all the way in until it stops.

Figure 7-6 Battery Location on I/O Baseboard

Battery

150 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Memory Extender Board

Memory Extender Board


The memory extender board is located directly under the front cover of the chassis. The standard memory extender board can
hold up to 16 DIMMs. The high capacity memory extender board can hold up to 32 DIMMs.

WARNING Ensure that the system is powered down and all power sources have been disconnected from the server
prior to removing or replacing a memory extender board.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected.
This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position.
Failure to observe this warning could result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety
precautions could result in damage to the server.

Removing a Memory Extender Board


To remove a memory extender board, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

NOTE If desired, the memory extender board may be removed without removing the HP Server from the
rack.

Step 2. Remove the front bezel from the chassis. See “Front Bezel” on page 144.

Step 3. Remove the front cover from the chassis. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

Step 4. Press each latch on the two extraction levers located on each side of the memory extender board.

Chapter 7 151
Removing and Replacing Components
Memory Extender Board

Step 5. Pull on the extraction levers to unplug the memory extender board from the socket located on the midplane riser
board and remove the memory extender board from the chassis.

Figure 7-7 Memory Extender Board Latches

152 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Memory Extender Board

Figure 7-8 Memory Extender Board

Replacing a Memory Extender Board


To replace the memory extender board, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Ensure the extraction levers are positioned in the outward, unlocked position.

Step 2. Align the memory extender board with the front and rear chassis guide slots.

Step 3. Slide the memory extender board in until it begins to seat in the socket located on the midplane board.

Step 4. Push the extraction levers inward to the locked position in order to plug in the memory extender board into the
midplane riser board.

Step 5. Replace the front cover.

Step 6. Replace the front bezel.

Step 7. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server into the rack until it stops.

Chapter 7 153
Removing and Replacing Components
System Memory DIMMs

System Memory DIMMs


System memory DIMMs are located on the memory extender board.

WARNING Ensure that the system is powered down and all power sources have been disconnected from the server
prior to removing or replacing system memory DIMMs.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected.
This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position.
Failure to observe this warning could result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety
precautions could result in damage to the server.

Removing System Memory DIMMs


To remove system memory, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

NOTE If desired, the processor extender board may be removed without removing the HP Server from
the rack.

Step 2. Remove the front bezel. See “Front Bezel” on page 144.

Step 3. Remove the front cover. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

Step 4. Remove the memory extender board. See “Memory Extender Board” on page 151.

Step 5. Identify the DIMM to be removed and push the appropriate extraction levers found on either side of the DIMM
slot outward to the open position. The DIMM will eject from the slot.

Step 6. Remove the DIMM from the socket.

Installing Memory DIMMs


Your hp Integrity rx4640 comes with a sixteen DIMM memory extender board that is minimally configured with 1GB of
memory [four 256Mb DIMMs loaded in quad 0 (slots 0A,0B,0C,and 0D)]. See Figure 7-9, “16 DIMM Extender Board Slot
IDs.”
An optional thirty-two DIMM memory extender board is available to replace the sixteen DIMM memory extender board and
must also be minimally configured with 1GB in quad 0. See Figure 7-10, “32 DIMM Extender Board Slot IDs.”
You may insert additional DIMMs into both sixteen and thirty-two DIMM boards. When adding DIMMs, you must use a
minimum of four like sized DIMMs in the next available quad.

154 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
System Memory DIMMs

Supported DIMM Sizes


Supported DIMM sizes are 256MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GB. Dissimilar DIMM sizes may be used across the entire extender board
but all four DIMMs in each quad must match. For cooling purposes, DIMM fillers must be used in some unused slots.

DIMM Slot Fillers


Both the sixteen and thirty-two DIMM extender boards have DIMM slot filler boards placed over all unfilled DIMM slots. As
you fill DIMM quads with additional memory you must remove the DIMM slot fillers covering the affected slots. All
remaining DIMM fillers in unused slots must remain in place to maximize internal cooling. See Table 7-1, “DIMM Filler
Requirements for 16 DIMM Extender Board.”

Chapter 7 155
Removing and Replacing Components
System Memory DIMMs

NOTE One DIMM filler board covers two adjacent DIMM slots. As a general rule, only remove DIMM slot fillers as
you add memory and the correct configuration will always remain.

Table 7-1 DIMM Filler Requirements for 16 DIMM Extender Board

16 DIMM Extender Board

DIMMs Loaded Fillers Requireda

4 DIMMs in quad 0 6 fillers total:

2 fillers in quads 1, 2, and 3

(all quads filled)

8 DIMMs in quads 0 and 1 4 fillers total:

2 fillers in quads 2 and 3

(all quads filled)

12 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, and 2 2 fillers total:

2 fillers in quads 3

(all quads filled)

16 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, and 3 No fillers required

a. One DIMM filler board covers two adjacent DIMM slots.

Table 7-2 DIMM Filler Requirements for 32 DIMM Extender Board

32 DIMM Extender Board

DIMMs Loaded Fillers requireda

4 DIMMs in quad 0 12 fillers total:

2 fillers in quads 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7

(quad 2 remains unfilled)

8 DIMMs in quads 0 and 1 8 fillers total:

2 fillers in quads 4, 5, 6, and 7

(quads 2 and 3 remain unfilled)

156 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
System Memory DIMMs

Table 7-2 DIMM Filler Requirements for 32 DIMM Extender Board (Continued)

32 DIMM Extender Board

DIMMs Loaded Fillers requireda

12 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, and 2 8 fillers total:

2 fillers in quads 4, 5, 6, and 7

(quad 3 remains unfilled)

16 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, and 3 8 fillers total:

2 fillers in quads 4, 5, 6, and 7

(all quads filled)

20 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 4 fillers total:

2 fillers in quads 5, 7

quad 6 remains unfilled

24 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 No fillers required

28 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 No fillers required

32 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 No fillers required

a. One DIMM filler board covers two DIMM adjacent slots.

Chapter 7 157
Removing and Replacing Components
System Memory DIMMs

Figure 7-9 16 DIMM Extender Board Slot IDs

Figure 7-10 32 DIMM Extender Board Slot IDs

Installing DIMMs
To install DIMMs, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Align the DIMM with the socket located on the memory extender board.

Step 2. Gently and evenly push on each side of the DIMM until it seats in the socket. Ensure that the extraction levers are
in the closed position.

Step 3. Replace the memory extender board.

Step 4. Replace the top cover.

158 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
System Memory DIMMs

Step 5. Replace the front bezel.

Step 6. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server into the rack until it stops.

Figure 7-11 Inserting DIMM into Extender Board Slot

Chapter 7 159
Removing and Replacing Components
Processor Extender Board

Processor Extender Board


The processor extender board is located directly under the memory extender board. The processor extender board can hold
between one and four processors.

WARNING Ensure that the system is powered down and all power sources have been disconnected from the server
prior to removing or replacing the processor extender board.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected.
This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position.
Failure to observe this warning could result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure will result in erratic system behavior or system failure.
For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service Provider.
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety
precautions could result in damage to the server.

Removing the Processor Extender Board


To remove the processor extender board, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

NOTE If desired, the processor extender board may be removed without removing the HP Server from
the rack.

Step 2. Remove the front bezel. See “Front Bezel” on page 144.

Step 3. Remove the front cover. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

Step 4. Press the latch on the extraction levers located on each side of the processor extender board.

160 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Processor Extender Board

Step 5. Pull out on the extraction levers to unplug the processor extender board from the socket located on the midplane
riser board.

Figure 7-12 Processor Extender Board

Replacing the Processor Extender Board


To replace the processor extender board, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Ensure the extraction levers are positioned in the outward, unlocked position.

Step 2. Align the processor extender board with the front and rear card guides.

Step 3. Slide the processor extender board down until it begins to seat in the socket located on the midplane riser board.

Step 4. Push the extraction levers inward to the locked position in order to fully seat the processor extender board into the
socket on the midplane riser board.

Step 5. Replace the front cover.

Step 6. Replace the front bezel.

Step 7. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server into the rack until it stops.

Chapter 7 161
Removing and Replacing Components
Processors

Processors
Processors are located on the top and bottom surfaces of the processor extender board.

WARNING Ensure that the system is powered down and all power sources have been disconnected from the server
prior to removing or replacing a processor.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected.
This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position.
Failure to observe this warning could result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

Installing Processors

CAUTION Ensure that the cache size is identical for all processors. Failure to observe this caution will result in system
failure.
Ensure that all processors are rated for use at the same speed. Failure to observe this caution will result in
performance degradation.

Processor Load Order


Processor moduless are housed on the processor extender board located under the top cover in the top service bay. The
processor extender board can hold between one and four processor modules. CPU 0 and CPU 1 are located on the top of the
processor extender board and CPU 2 and CPU 3 are located on the bottom. Processors must be installed in a specific order.
Table 7-3 Processor Load Order

Processor
Socket
Modules

First CPU 0

Second CPU 1

Third CPU 2

Fourth CPU 3

CAUTION Do not modify the settings of the DIP switches located on the processor extender board. These switches are
for factory use. Failure to observe this caution will result in system failure.

Removing a Processor
To remove a processor on the processor extender board, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the front bezel. See “Front Bezel” on page 144.

162 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Processors

Step 3. Remove the front cover. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

Step 4. Remove the memory extender board. See “Memory Extender Board” on page 151.

Step 5. Unplug the processor cable from its socket on the extender board.

Step 6. Using a torx T15 driver, loosen the 6, T15 shoulder screws that attach the sequencer frame on the heatsink, until
the sequencer frame is free.

Step 7. Remove the sequencer frame from the heatsink.

Step 8. Unlock the assembly to the socket by rotating the cam on the socket 180 degrees counterclockwise, using a 2.5
MM driver (Allen wrench).

Step 9. Ensure the cam on the processor socket lock is in the unlocked, counterclockwise position.

Step 10. Carefully remove the processor, from the processor socket.

Replacing a Processor
To install a processor on the extender board, perform the following steps:
Prior to installing a processor into your system, read the following instructions carefully and refer to Figure 7-15, “Installing
Processor on Extender Board,” for a complete understanding of this process.

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the front bezel. See “Front Bezel” on page 144.

Step 3. Remove the front cover. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

Step 4. Remove the memory extender board. See “Memory Extender Board” on page 151.

Step 5. Using an antistatic wrist strap place the extender board ona grounding mat (Electrically Conductive Field Service
Grounding Kit-HP 9300-1155).

Step 6. Ensure the cam on the processor socket lock is in the unlocked, counterclockwise position.

Step 7. Carefully lower the processor, without the sequencer clamp, onto the processor socket. Align the pins on the
bottom of the heatsink to the slots in the retention frame on the extender board.

CAUTION Test the alignment of the assembly to the socket by gently moving the assembly back and forth
with the palm of your hand—you should feel little or no sideplay. However, because the assembly
is not yet tightened, it may tilt slightly towards the center of the extender board—this is
acceptable.

CAUTION Before locking the processor assembly into its socket, ensure that the power cable is not pinched
between the heatsink and sheetmetal frame of the extender board. Also, ensure that the two power
supply cable ends attached to the CPU assembly do not come unplugged from their sockets when
you move the cable into place under the heatsink. See Figure 7-13, “Processor Cable Placed
Correctly,” and Figure 7-14, “Processor Cable Placed Incorrectly.”

Step 8. Lock the assembly to the socket by rotating the cam on the socket 180 degrees clockwise, using a 2.5 mm driver
(Allen wrench).

Chapter 7 163
Removing and Replacing Components
Processors

CAUTION When rotating the locking cam, hold the palm of your hand on top of the assembly and exert light
pressure. This ensures that the assembly stays flush and level to the socket while it is being
tightened.

Figure 7-13 Processor Cable Placed Correctly

Heatsink
Cable is placed correctly
and is under the heatsink
Protective plastic sleeve

Sheetmetal frame

Figure 7-14 Processor Cable Placed Incorrectly

Heatsink
Cable is placed
incorrectly and is
pinched between the
heatsink and the
extender board frame
Protective plastic sleeve

Sheetmetal frame

Step 9. Plug in the processor cable to its socket on the extender board.

Step 10. Place the sequencer frame over the processor.

Step 11. Using the supplied torx T15 driver, tighten the 6 T15 shoulder screws until they just bottom out. Follow the
tightening sequence shown in Figure 7-15, “Installing Processor on Extender Board.”

164 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Processors

CAUTION Do not overtighten the 6 shoulder screws—they may shear off if overtightened. Stop tightening
the shoulder screws when you feel them just bottom out.

Chapter 7 165
Removing and Replacing Components
Processors

Figure 7-15 Installing Processor on Extender Board


Tightening sequence for 6-shoulder
screws is:
AB371A or AB372A: 1,2,3,4,5,6
AB373A: 3.4,1,2,5,6
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN!

3 Sequencer
4
5

1
6
Torx-T15
Shoulder Use supplied
screws wrench for
tightening
shoulder screws
and thumbscrews
2.5MM Allen

Power cable protected by


plastic sleeve

Align pins on
heatsink with
slots in frame

slots*

slots*
*slots shown are at
CPU socket #1 for
clarity.
Processor shown is
being mounted on
socket #0 per CPU load
order.

166 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Swap Chassis Fan Unit

Hot-Swap Chassis Fan Unit


There are three hot-swap chassis fan units in the HP Server. Fan units 0, 1, and 2 are in the center of the chassis spanning the
full chassis width. Fan units 0 and 1 are interchangeable and are in the left and center positions. Fan unit 2 is smaller and only
fits into the right-most position (behind the power supply).

CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety
precautions could result in damage to the server.

NOTE A hot-swap device does not require interaction with the operating system before the device is removed from
or installed into the server.
The AC power to the server does not have to be off to remove or replace a hot-swap chassis fan unit.

Chapter 7 167
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Swap Chassis Fan Unit

Removing a Hot-Swap Chassis Fan Unit

Figure 7-16 Hot-Swap I/O Chassis Fans Removal and Replacement

To remove a hot-swap chassis fan unit, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the top cover. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

Step 3. Grasp the fan unit locking handle, tilt it up, and pull out the fan from the chassis.

168 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Swap Chassis Fan Unit

NOTE When one fan unit is removed from the server, the remaining fan units operate at full speed for
two minutes. After two minutes a “soft-shutdown” will occur.

Figure 7-17 Hot-Swap Power Supply Chassis Fan Removal and Replacement

Replacing a Hot-Swap Chassis Fan Unit


To replace a hot-swap chassis fan unit, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Orient the fan units by aligning the appropriate icon on the fan unit handle to the identical icon on the chassis wall.
Fan units 0 and 1 have “triangle” icons and fan unit 2 has a “square” icon.

Step 2. Push the fan unit firmly into the housing and close the handle until flush to the top of the chassis—the fan unit will
plug into the power outlet on the I/O baseboard.

Chapter 7 169
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Swap Chassis Fan Unit

CAUTION If the fan unit handle does not close completely it is misaligned. Remove the fan unit and check
that the alignment icons are oriented correctly.

Step 3. Check the QuickFind diagnostic board LED indicating the replaced fan unit.

• When the fan is functioning normally, the LED is off.

• When the fan fails, the LED is lit.

Step 4. Replace the top cover.

Step 5. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server into the rack until it stops.

170 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
I/O Baseboard Assembly

I/O Baseboard Assembly


The I/O baseboard assembly is located in the rear service bay.

WARNING Ensure that the system is powered down and all power sources have been disconnected from the server
prior to removing or replacing the I/O baseboard assembly.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected.
This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position.
Failure to observe this warning could result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure will result in erratic system behavior or system failure.
For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service Provider.
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety
precautions could result in damage to the server.

Removing the I/O Baseboard Assembly


To remove the I/O baseboard assembly, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the top cover. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

Step 3. Remove the three chassis fan units. See “Hot-Swap Chassis Fan Unit” on page 168.

Step 4. Unplug all external cabling attached to ports at the rear of the I/O baseboard.

Step 5. Unplug the SCSI cables attached to the HBA board in PCI slot 1.

CAUTION When unplugging the SCSI cables, note the labeling on the SCSI A and SCSI B channel cables.
When replugging in these cables, you must match each cable with its appropriate socket on the
SCSI HBA. If the cables are mismatched your system may not reboot. Both cables and sockets are
clearly marked with the correct channel.

Step 6. Twist open the thumbscrew on the rear left side of system I/O board. See Figure 7-19, “I/O Baseboard.”

Step 7. Lift up on the locking lever attached to the side of the Power Supply cage to unplug the I/O baseboard from the
socket on the midplane riser board. See Figure 7-18, “I/O Board Locking Lever.”

Step 8. Slide the I/O baseboard assembly all the way to the rear until removed from chassis.

Chapter 7 171
Removing and Replacing Components
I/O Baseboard Assembly

NOTE The I/O baseboard assembly is large, so be careful when lifting it out of the server chassis.

Figure 7-18 I/O Board Locking Lever

OPEN

CLOSE

172 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
I/O Baseboard Assembly

Figure 7-19 I/O Baseboard

Replacing the I/O baseboard Assembly

NOTE The I/O baseboard is large, so use care when sliding it into the server chassis.

To replace the I/O baseboard assembly, perform the following steps:

Chapter 7 173
Removing and Replacing Components
I/O Baseboard Assembly

Step 1. Set the I/O baseboard select switches as shown in

Figure 7-20I/O Baseboard Select Switches

Select switches

Step 2. Align the I/O baseboard assembly rails with the chassis slots and slide the assembly into the chassis until it stops
against the midplane riser board socket.

CAUTION Ensure the I/O board locking lever is in the “up” position or the I/O board will hang up before
engaging the midplane riser board socket.

Step 3. With the I/O board flush against the midplane riser board socket, push down firmly on the locking lever until the
I/O baseboard plugs all the way into the midplane riser board socket.

Step 4. Replace the three chassis fan units.

Step 5. Plug in all external cabling the rear ports of the I/O baseboard.

174 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
I/O Baseboard Assembly

CAUTION When replugging the SCSI cables, note the labeling on the SCSI A and SCSI B channel cables.
You must match each cable with its appropriate socket on the SCSI HBA. If the cables are
mismatched your system may not reboot. Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the
correct channel.

Step 6. Plug in the internal SCSI cable(s) to the HBA board in PCI slot 1.

Step 7. Replace the top cover.

Step 8. Replace the front bezel.

Step 9. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server into the rack until it stops.

Step 10. Power up and boot to EFI.

Step 11. Respond YES to prompts regarding copying information onto the

new board.

Step 12. Enter SERVICE mode.


Shell> sysmode service

Current System Mode: ADMIN

You are now in SERVICE mode.

Step 13. Use the 'sysset' command to enter the product data:
Shell> sysset prodname "server rx4640"

Step 14. Use the 'sysset' command to verify all values are set:
Shell> sysset

System Information:

Manufacturer: hp

Product Name: server rx4640

Product Number: A6961A

Secondary Product Number is Identical

Serial number: SGH43442VB

Secondary Serial Number is Identical

UUID: 3C33C58E-2E5A-11D8-A33B-4188C0AEFAE2 (Valid)

Secondary UUID is Identical

Product ID: 0x301

Step 15. Use the EFI 'date' and 'time' commands to set the correct local date and time.

Step 16. Boot the server and resume normal operation.

Chapter 7 175
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Plug PCI-X

Hot-Plug PCI-X
The hp Integrity rx4640 Server supports PCI-X hot-plug technology and offers 6 PCI-X, hot-plug capable slots.

Hot-Plug PCI-X Operations


PCI-X hot-plug technology enables the following hot-plug operations. For procedures with step-by-step instructions
describing how to add, replace, delete, and locate PCI-X cards see “Hot-Plug Operation Procedures” on page 182.

• Online Addition (OL-A)


You can install new PCI-X expansion cards in previously empty slots without powering down the server.
• Online Replacement (OL-R)
You can replace a previously occupied slot with a new PCI-X expansion card by suspending the driver. This operation
combines removing an active card and replacing it with an equivalent capability card. The existing driver for the old card
must be compatible with the new card.

CAUTION A special OL-R requirement for HP-UX 11i v2 is that the card to be inserted (replaced) must be exactly
the same as the removed card. This is also known as like-for-like replacement.

NOTE Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition does not support OL-R. Instead, you can do a combination of an
OL-D operation followed by an OL-A operation. This is the equivalent of an OL-R operation.

• Online Deletion (OL-D)


You can remove an existing PCI-X expansion card. This operation is different from OL-R because there are no restrictions
placed on the type of replacement card that you can use. In this operation, the drivers are also completely removed from
the slot.

NOTE HP-UX 11i v2 does not support OL-D. It does support OL-R.

• PCI-X Slot Locate (Locate)


To easily locate the PCI-X slot at which you wish to perform a hot-plug operation, you can command the attention LEDs,
on the OLX divider and the I/O baseboard, to blink and act as visual cues to the active slot location. This operation is
always initiated via a software or web interface and is optional to the operating system on your HP Server.

Operating System Support for Hot-Plug PCI-X Operations


The capability of each operating system to support hot-plug PCI-X operations is different. The following explanation details
the capabilities of each operation system.

• HP-UX 11i v2
HP-UX 11i v2 supports only OL-A, OL-R, and Locate hot-plug PCI-X operations.
In OL-R, it is a requirement that the card to be inserted (replaced) be exactly the same as the card being removed. During
this OL-R operation, HP-UX 11i v2 suspends the device driver and re-enables it upon completion of the OL-R operation.
In HP-UX 11i v2, the Locate function is only available via the command line or web interface.

176 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Plug PCI-X

• Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition


Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition supports only OL-A and OL-D hot-plug PCI-X operations.
In OL-D, Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition will delete the device object, after the card’s successful removal from
the slot. You do not have to re-install drivers for the deleted device on subsequent insertions or reboots
To perform a card replacement hot-plug PCI-X operation in Windows Server 2003, you must first perform an OL-D
operation followed by an OL-A operation.
• Linux Red Hat Advanced Server 2.1
At this time Linux Red Hat Advanced Server 2.1 does not support hot-plug PCI-X technology. Future releases will
support hot-plug PCI-X technology.
The following table shows hot-plug operations that are available in HP-UX 11i v2, Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition,
and Linux Red Hat Advanced Server 2.1 operating systems.
Table 7-4 Hot-Plug Operation and OS Compatibility

Linux Red Hat


Hot-Plug Windows Server 2003
HP-UX 11i v2 Advanced Server
Operation Enterprise Edition
2.1

OL-A Yes Yes No

OL-R Yes. HP-UX 11i v2 demands like-for-like No. But, you can perform a No
replacement. A like-for-like card means that combination of OL-D and OL-A
the new card is exactly the same as the card to replace a card.
being replaced.

OL-D Not supported by HP-UX 11i v2. Yes No

Locate Yes. Only supported via the command line No No


interface or the web interface.

PCI-X Hardware and Software Interfaces


The following table shows what hot-plug hardware and software interfaces are available on HP-UX 11i v2, Windows Server
2003 Enterprise Edition, and Linux Red Hat Advanced Server 2.1 operating systems.
Table 7-5 Hot-Plug Hardware and Software Interfaces and OS Availability

Linux Red
Windows Server 2003
Hot-Plug PCI-X Interface HP-UX 11i v2 Hat Advanced
Enterprise Edition
Server 2.1

Hardware interface comprised of: Yes Yes No


—Attention Button
—Manual Retention Latch
—Power LED
—Attention LED
—PCI-X card lock

Chapter 7 177
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Plug PCI-X

Table 7-5 Hot-Plug Hardware and Software Interfaces and OS Availability (Continued)

Linux Red
Windows Server 2003
Hot-Plug PCI-X Interface HP-UX 11i v2 Hat Advanced
Enterprise Edition
Server 2.1

Graphical User Interface Yes Yes. You can use the No


Safely Remove
Hardware icon in the tool
tray or device manager to
remove a device (OL-D).
OL-A is only possible via
the hardware interface.

Command Line Interface (CLI) Yes -olrad command. Read No No


Interface Card OL* Support
for HP-UX Servers and
Workstations, olrad Command
Line Interface, B2355-90804 at
http://docs.hp.com.

Web Interface Yes- pdweb command. Read No No


Interface Card OL* Support
for HP-UX Servers and
Workstations,
pdweb-Peripheral Device tool
Web Interface, B2355-90804 at
http://docs.hp.com.

PCI-X Slot Locations and Configurations


PCI-X slots are numbered from 1 through 8 in your HP Server. See Figure 7-21, “Slot ID Numbering.”
The following describes configuration requirements for slots 1 through 8:

• PCI slots 1 and 2 are dedicated for use by the core I/O cards—SCSI HBA card in slot 1 and Gigabit Ethernet LAN card in
slot 2. Slots 1 and 2 are not hot-plug capable. Additional PCI-X expansion cards may not be placed in slots 1 or 2.
• Slot 3 and 4 is the first pair of shared slots, and slot 5 and 6 is the second pair of shared slots. The maximum capability of
each of the shared slot is PCI-X 66MHz. If a PCI-X 133 MHz card is placed in a shared slot, then the maximum capability
the PCI-X 133 MHz card will run at is PCI-X 66MHz. If different modes (PCI vs. PCI-X) or slower speeds (33 MHz) are
used, then the slot to be used will automatically downgrade to accept the change.
Shared slots have card compatibility restrictions. If one of the shared slots is occupied then the card being added to the
second slot is limited by the configuration of the occupied slot. If the new card has a slower capability than the current bus
configuration, it will be rejected. If the new card has a faster capability than the current bus configuration, it will only run
at the bus mode and frequency of the current bus configuration (slower).

1. If you have a 66 MHz card in slot 3, and you hot-plug insert a 33 Mhz card into slot 4, then the operation will not
succeed. The new 33 MHz card will not initialize and the slot will power down because you cannot change bus speed
during hot-plug operations.

178 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Plug PCI-X

NOTE If the system is rebooted in the new configuration, then both cards will initialize to run at 33 MHz.
This is because the system firmware can only change the bus capability from 66 MHz down to 33
MHz.

2. If you have a 33 MHz card in slot 3, and you hot-plug insert a 66 Mhz card into slot 4, it will work but the new card
will run at 33 MHz. This also applies to slots 5 and 6, as they are shared (both use a common bus).
3. If your unit is powered down and you insert a 33 MHz card into slot 4 (that shares a 66 MHz card in slot 3), then both
cards will run at 33 MHz when the unit is powered up. This also applies to slots 5 and 6, as they are shared (both use
a common bus).
• Slots 7 and 8 are single slots. The maximum capability of each slot is PCI-X 133MH. Only slots 7 and 8 will allow 133
Mhz, PCI-X cards to run at full speed. These two slots are not limited by bus mode frequency related incompatibilities.
Table 7-6 PCI-X Card vs. Slot Frequency/Bus Mode Compatibility for Shared Slotsa

Current PCI Bus Cards to be installed


Mode and
Frequency for the
PCI 33 PCI 66 PCI-X 66 PCI-X 133
Shared Slot

PCI 33 MHz Compatibleb Compatible Compatible Compatible


(2nd note) (2nd note) (2nd note)
New card New card New card
running at PCI running at PCI running at PCI
33 33 33

PCI 66 MHz Incompatible-F Compatible Compatible Compatible


requencyc (2nd note) (2nd note) (2nd note)
New card New card
running at PCI running at PCI
66 66

PCI-X 66 MHz Incompatible-F Incompatible-B Compatible Compatible


requency usd (2nd note) (2nd note)
(3rd note) New card
running at
PCI-X 66

PCI-X 133 MHze Incompatible-F Incompatible-Fr Compatible Compatible


requency equency (2nd note) (2nd note)
(3rd note) (3rd note) New card New card
running at
PCI-X 66

a. NOTE: The conditions described in this table apply only to shared slots (slots 3,4-bus 2
and 5,6-bus 3). Slots 7 and 8 are not shared slots.
b. Compatible: card is accepted and runs at frequency shown.
c. Incompatible-Frequency: card is rejected. The new card will not initialized and will power
down due to frequency mismatch.
d. Incompatible-Bus: Card is rejected. The new card will not initialize and will power down
due to bus mode mismatch.
e. Maximum bus mode and frequency supported on shared slots is PCI-X 66 MHz.

Chapter 7 179
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Plug PCI-X

CAUTION If you are using Linux Red Hat Advanced Server 2.1 operating system and you want to install a 1000b-Sx
GigE card, do not install it into a slot that shares a bus with a 33 MHz card. In this configuration the Linux
driver will not initialize the new card.

CAUTION Do not use more than 3 RAID cards in any of the slots on your hp Integrity rx4640 Server. System power
limitations restrict the use of more than 3 RAID cards per system.

Figure 7-21 Slot ID Numbering

PCI-X Bus 1
PCI-X Bus 2

PCI-X Bus 3
PCI-X Bus 4
PCI-X Bus 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Slot ID Number

Amber attention LEDs, 6x

Green power LEDs, 6x

Amber attention LEDs, 6x


Core I/O Public I/O
PCI-X PCI-X, Hot-Plug

180 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Plug PCI-X

Hot-Plug Operation Procedures


The hot-plug procedures described in this section will use the hardware interface only. Software interface procedures are
described in Table 7-5, “Hot-Plug Hardware and Software Interfaces and OS Availability.” For a complete understanding of all
HP-UX 11i v2 hot-plug techniques and concepts, it is recommended that you refer to Interface Card OL* Support for HP-UX
Servers and Workstations, B2355-90804 at http://docs.hp.com.

CAUTION Before adding or replacing a PCI-X card, determine if that card is critical to your systems operation. If you
replace a card that is still operating and it is a critical resource to your system, you may cause undesired
system downtime. Read Interface Card OL* Support for HP-UX Servers and Workstations, Critical
Resources, B2355-90804, at http://docs.hp.com, prior to performing a hot-plug operation.

Online Addition-(OL-A)
Before installing a PCI-X card, ensure that the proper drivers for that PCI-X card are installed.
To add a PCI-X card into an empty slot, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the top cover from the chassis. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

Step 3. If the power LED is steady-on (power to slot is on), go to step 4. If the power LED is steady-off (power to slot is
off), go to step 5.

Step 4. To turn off power to the slot, pull up on the manual retention latch (MRL) located on the OLX divider. The power
LED goes to steady-off. See Figure 7-22, “PCI-X OLX Divider Layout.”

CAUTION Do not pull up on the MRL of a powered-on, occupied slot or your system will crash. This OL-A
procedure is for powering down a powered-on, unoccupied slot only. For a detailed procedure on
how to power down an occupied slot see “Online Replacement-(OL-R)” or “Online Deletion
(OL-D)”.

Step 5. Ensure that the MRL is already open and insert the PCI-X card to be added into the powered down slot. See
Figure 7-23, “Inserting PCI-X Card.”

CAUTION When inserting the PCI-X card, be careful you do not accidentally touch an attention button on the
other OLX dividers—this will initiate an undesired shutdown of another PCI-X card/slot.

Also, ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot or undesired results may occur after power is
re-applied to the slot.

Step 6. Push the manual retention latch down until it seats against the chassis wall.

Step 7. Turn the PCI-X card lock to the closed position to capture the PCI-X card and manual retention latch into the
closed position.

Step 8. Press the attention button and the power LED starts to blink. Wait until the power LED goes from blinking to
steady-on.

Chapter 7 181
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Plug PCI-X

NOTE After pushing the attention button, you have 5 seconds to cancel the operation by pushing the
attention button again.

Step 9. Replace the top cover.

182 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Plug PCI-X

Step 10. Push the HP Server all the way back into the rack until it stops.

Figure 7-22PCI-X OLX Divider Layout


PCI-X card latch
closed position PCI-X card latch
Manual retention open position
latch—closed Manual retention
latch—open

Power LED
light pipe
Attention button
Attention LED
light pipe

Chapter 7 183
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Plug PCI-X

Figure 7-23 Inserting PCI-X Card

Online Deletion (OL-D)


To delete a PCI-X card from an occupied slot, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the top cover from the chassis. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

184 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Plug PCI-X

Step 3. Press the attention button located on the OLX divider that controls the affected slot—the power LED starts to
blink. Wait until the power LED goes from blinking to steady-off.

NOTE After pushing the attention button, you have 5 seconds to cancel the operation by pushing the
attention button again.

Step 4. Turn the PCI-X card lock on the chassis until the manual retention latch (MRL) is free to pull up.

Step 5. At this point, the power to the slot is off; pull up on the manual retention latch located on the OLX divider. See
Figure 7-22, “PCI-X OLX Divider Layout.”

Step 6. Remove the existing PCI-X card from the slot.

Step 7. Push the manual retention latch down until it seats against the chassis wall.

Step 8. Replace the top cover.

Step 9. Push the HP Server all the way back into the rack until it stops.

Online Replacement-(OL-R)
As discussed in the opening section, OL-R is a combination of an OL-D procedure followed by an OL-A procedure.

CAUTION For HP-UX 11i v2 only. You can only replace an existing card with a like card.

To remove and replace a PCI-X card into a populated slot, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the top cover from the chassis. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

Step 3. Press the attention button located on the OLX divider controls the affected slot—the power LED starts to blink.
Wait until the power LED goes from blinking to steady-off.

NOTE After pushing the attention button, you have 5 seconds to cancel the operation by pushing the
attention button again.

Step 4. Turn the PCI-X card lock on the chassis until the manual retention latch (MRL) is free to pull up.

Step 5. At this point, the power to the slot is off; pull up on the manual retention latch located on the OLX divider. See
Figure 7-22, “PCI-X OLX Divider Layout.”

Step 6. Remove the existing PCI-X card from the slot.

Step 7. Insert the new PCI-X card into the powered down slot. See Figure 7-23, “Inserting PCI-X Card.”

CAUTION When inserting the PCI-X card, be careful you do not accidentally touch an attention button on the
other OLX dividers—this will initiate an undesired shutdown of another PCI-X card/slot.

Also, ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot or undesired results may occur after power is
re-applied to the slot.

Chapter 7 185
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Plug PCI-X

Step 8. Push the manual retention latch down until it seats against the chassis wall.

Step 9. Turn the PCI-X card lock on the chassis to the closed position. This locks the PCI-X card into its slot and the
manual retention latch into the closed position.

Step 10. Press the attention button—the power LED will start to blink.

Step 11. Wait for the power LED to stop blinking—the PCI-X card is now active.

Step 12. Replace the top cover.

Step 13. Push the HP Server all the way back into the rack until it stops.

Understanding LEDs and Hardware Errors


The following table describes the hot-plug LED error conditions.
Table 7-7 Hot-Plug LED Descriptions

Power LED-Green Condition Description

On PCI-X slot is powered on.

Blinking Hot-plug operation in progress—do not touch the slot.

Off PCI-X slot is powered off.

Attention LED-Amber Condition Description

On Hardware operational fault.

NOTE: If slot is powered on, it will not power off. If slot is powered
off, it will not power on.

Blinking Slot location being indicated.

NOTE: If you want to learn how to activate the attention LED into
the blinking/indicator state, read Interface Card OL* Support for
HP-UX Servers and Workstations, Turning Attention LED to Blink or
Off, B2355-90804 at http://docs.hp.com.

Off If power to slot is on, the slot is functioning normally.

Troubleshooting PCI-X Hot-Plug Operations


Sometimes a PCI-X card will not come online during a hot-plug operation due to a frequency mismatch between the PCI-X
card and the slot bus or due to other hardware errors. To determine the type of error you are experiencing, observe the LED
activity as described below. For a full understanding and description of HP-UX 11i v2 hardware errors, read Interface Card
OL* Support for HP-UX Servers and Workstations, Important Considerations, B2355-90804 at http://docs.hp.com.

1. PCI-X Bus Mode or Frequency Mismatch


After you insert a PCI-X card into the slot and push the attention button, the power LED goes from blinking to steady-off
and stays at steady-off; this means that the system firmware has rejected the PCI-X card, and indicates either bus
frequency or bus mode mismatch.

186 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Plug PCI-X

NOTE After pushing the attention button, ensure that you wait the full duration of the 5 second operation
cancellation window before taking further action.

2. Hardware Operation Fault


If the PCI-X card cannot be powered on during a hot-plug addition operation, the attention LED will turn steady-on and
the power LED will go steady-off.

CAUTION If your card will not power up, the power loss may be due to the existing PCI-X expansion cards using all
the available power. Check the power ratings of your existing PCI-X cards. A known cause of power loss
is the use of more than 3 RAID cards in your system.

If the PCI-X card cannot be powered off during a hot-plug removal operation, the attention button will turn steady-on and
the power LED will remain steady-on.

CAUTION If your slot does not power off during a hot-plug removal operation, do not open the manual retention
latch (MRL) on the OLX divider. This action causes system failure or operating system crashes.

Chapter 7 187
Removing and Replacing Components
OLX Dividers

OLX Dividers
OLX dividers are located on the I/O baseboard, between the PCI cards. Six OLX dividers provide short circuit protection to
the hot-plug PCI accessory boards by preventing inadvertent contact between boards during the replacement or addition of a
board.
Additionally, each OLX divider has two light pipes that transfer illumination from one green power LED and one amber
attention LED, mounted on the I/O board, to the top of the divider. The light pipes allow the LED status to be easily viewed
when the top cover is removed.

WARNING Ensure that the system is powered down and all power sources have been disconnected from the server
prior to removing or replacing a PCI card divider.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected.
This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position.
Failure to observe this warning could result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

188 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
OLX Dividers

CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety
precautions could result in damage to the server.

Figure 7-24 OLX Divider Removal and Replacement

Manual retention latch

Locking tabs

Chapter 7 189
Removing and Replacing Components
OLX Dividers

Figure 7-25 OLX Divider Latch

CLOSED
OPEN

190 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
OLX Dividers

Removing an OLX Divider


To remove an OLX divider, perform the following steps:

NOTE An alternative method of removing OLX dividers individually is to remove all OLX dividers at once by
removing the rack they are mounted in from the I/O baseboard, then removing or replacing the individual
OLX divider, and then replacing the rack back on the I/O baseboard. The OLX divider rack is attached to the
I/O baseboard with 4 torx T15 fasteners.

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the front bezel. See “Front Bezel” on page 144.

Step 3. Remove the top cover. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

Step 4. Pull up on the manual retention latch to unlock it from the chassis wall. See Figure 7-24, “OLX Divider Removal
and Replacement.”

Step 5. Slide open the latch on the rear PCI cage wall to unlock the rear edge of the PCI divider. See Figure 7-25, “OLX
Divider Latch.”

Step 6. At this point, if you are removing the entire OLX divider rack, remove the 4 T15 fasteners attaching the rack to the
I/O baseboard.

Step 7. Using your fingers, push the two tabs that attach the OLX divider to the I/O baseboard and pull the OLX divider up
sharply to disengage it from the I/O baseboard.

CAUTION When extracting the OLX divider, ensure that you release the locking tabs completely or you may
damage them. If you damage the tabs, the OLX divider will not seat properly when you reinsert it,

Replacing an OLX Divider


To replace an OLX divider, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Insert the OLX divider into the available slots on the I/O baseboard and push down firmly to seat it into the slots.

Step 2. At this point, if you are replacing the entire OLX divider rack on to the I/O baseboard, replace the 4 torx T15
fasteners.

Step 3. Slide the latch on the rear OLX divider wall closed, to lock the rear edge of the PCI divider.

Step 4. Push down on the manual retention latch until it locks into the chassis wall.

Step 5. Replace the top cover.

Step 6. Replace the front bezel.

Step 7. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server into the rack until it stops.

Chapter 7 191
Removing and Replacing Components
Voltage Regulator Modules (VRM)

Voltage Regulator Modules (VRM)


The server contains 3 VRMs that are located on I/O baseboard. Each is labeled with one of the following voltages:

• 3.3 Volts
• 5.0 Volts
• 12.0 Volts

CAUTION VRMs must be inserted into the slot with the corresponding voltage. Ensure VRMs are located in the proper
slot by checking the voltage label on the I/O baseboard. See Figure 7-26, “VRM Board Remove and
Replace.”

WARNING Ensure that the system is powered down and all power sources have been disconnected from the server
prior to removing or replacing a VRM.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected.
This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position.
Failure to observe this warning could result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

192 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Voltage Regulator Modules (VRM)

CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety
precautions could result in damage to the server.

Figure 7-26 VRM Board Remove and Replace

12V VRM

3.3V VRM

5V VRM

Removing a Voltage Regulator Module (VRM)


To remove a VRM from the server, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Remove the I/O baseboard from the chassis. See “I/O Baseboard Assembly” on page 172.

Step 2. Push out the locking tabs at the end of the VRM slot to release it, then pull the VRM straight out of the I/O
baseboard.

Replacing a Voltage Regulator Module (VRM)


To replace a VRM, perform the following steps:

Chapter 7 193
Removing and Replacing Components
Voltage Regulator Modules (VRM)

Step 1. Push the VRM straight into the slot until it stops, then push in the two locking tabs on either side of the slot to lock
the VRM into position.

CAUTION Ensure that the VRM and slot voltages match up and also check that the heatsink on the VRM
faces the PCI card rack after installation. If the VRM is inserted backwards the system will halt
during the boot process.

Step 2. Replace the I/O baseboard in the chassis.

194 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Plug Disk Drives

Hot-Plug Disk Drives


The two hot-plug disk drives are located in the front of the HP Integrity rx4640.

CAUTION A hot-plug device may require interaction with the operating system before the device can be safely removed
from or installed into the server. Verify that the operating system supports removing/replacing disk drives
while the operating system is running. If the operating system does not support this feature, shut down the
operating system before attempting this procedure. Failure to observe this caution will result in system failure.

NOTE The replacement disk drive must be the same product ID as the disk drive that is being replaced.
HP often uses different manufacturers for disks that have the same product number. The replacement disk
drive will have the same capacity and block size as the defective disk because they have the same product
number.

Removing a Hot-Plug Disk Drive


To remove a hot-plug disk drive, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Grasp the tab at the bottom of the latch on the selected disk drive.

Step 2. Push the button inside the latch and pull the latch out and up; the disk will unlock.

Step 3. Pull gently until the hot-plug disk drive slides out of the chassis.

Replacing a Hot-Plug Disk Drive


One additional hot-plug disk drive may be added to your HP Server in slot 2. Always use low profile disk drives (1.0” height)
in your hp Integrity rx4640. See Figure 7-27, “Disk Drive Installation in Slots 1 and 2.”
To install a hot-plug disk drive, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Slide the hot-plug hard disk into slot 1 until it is seated.

Step 2. Close the drive-ejector handle by pushing it down until it clicks.

Chapter 7 195
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Plug Disk Drives

Step 3. The hot-plug disk drive is now correctly installed.

Figure 7-27 Disk Drive Installation in Slots 1 and 2

Slot 2-SCSI ID 1

Slot 1-SCSI ID 0

Figure 7-28 Disk Drive Installation in Slot 2

196 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Plug Disk Drives

Figure 7-29 Volume Filler Installation in Slot 2

Chapter 7 197
Removing and Replacing Components
SCSI Backplane Board

SCSI Backplane Board


The SCSI backplane board is attached to the rear of the disk media housing at the front, right side of the chassis.

WARNING Ensure that the system is powered down and all power sources have been disconnected from the server
prior to removing or replacing the SCSI backplane.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected.
This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position.
Failure to observe this warning could result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure will result in erratic system behavior or system failure.
For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service Provider.

198 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
SCSI Backplane Board

Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety
precautions could result in damage to the server.

Figure 7-30 SCSI Backplane Removal and Replacement

Removing the SCSI Backplane


To remove the SCSI backplane, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the front bezel. See “Front Bezel” on page 144.

Step 3. Remove the front cover. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

Step 4. Remove the memory extender board. See “Memory Extender Board” on page 151.

Chapter 7 199
Removing and Replacing Components
SCSI Backplane Board

Step 5. Remove the processor extender board. See “Processor Extender Board” on page 160.

Step 6. Remove the two hot-plug disk drives. See “Hot-Plug Disk Drives” on page 196.

Step 7. Unplug the internal SCSI cable(s) from the SCSI backplane board.

Step 8. Unplug the SCSI backplane-to-midplane riser cable from the SCSI backplane.

Step 9. Using your finger, turn the swivel latch on top of the hot-plug hard disk drive cage to unlatch the SCSI backplane
board from the hard disk cage.

Step 10. Grasp the top edge of the SCSI backplane board and pull up until it releases from the keyway slots on the back of
the hot-plug disk drive cage.

Step 11. Push the SCSI backplane board away from the disk drive cage and lift it up and out of the chassis.

Replacing the SCSI Backplane


To replace the SCSI backplane, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Replace the SCSI backplane to the rear of the disk drive cage.

Step 2. Replace the two hot-plug disk drives into the disk drive cage.

Step 3. Re-plug the SCSI backplane-to-midplane cable back into the SCSI backplane.

Step 4. Re-plug the internal SCSI cable into the SCSI back plane.

Step 5. Replace the processor extender board.

Step 6. Replace the memory extender board.

Step 7. Replace the front cover.

Step 8. Replace the front bezel.

Step 9. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server back into the rack until it stops.

200 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Midplane Riser Board

Midplane Riser Board


The midplane riser board is attached to the main bulkhead in the center of the chassis.

WARNING Ensure that the system is powered down and all power sources have been disconnected from the server
prior to removing or replacing the midplane riser backplane.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected.
This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position.
Failure to observe this warning could result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure will result in erratic system behavior or system failure.
For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service Provider.
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety
precautions could result in damage to the server.

Removing the Midplane Riser Board


To remove the midplane riser board, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the front bezel. See “Front Bezel” on page 144.

Step 3. Remove the front and top covers. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

Step 4. Remove the memory extender board. See “Memory Extender Board” on page 151.

Step 5. Remove the processor extender board. See “Processor Extender Board” on page 160.

Step 6. Remove the 3 chassis hot-swap fan units. See “Hot-Swap Chassis Fan Unit” on page 168.

Step 7. Remove the I/O baseboard assembly. See “I/O Baseboard Assembly” on page 172.

Step 8. Remove the SCSI backplane board. See “SCSI Backplane Board” on page 199.

Step 9. Unplug the power distribution board power cable and signal cable from the midplane riser board.

Step 10. Unplug the DVD relay board and front panel display board cable from the midplane riser board.

Step 11. Unplug the QuickFind diagnostic board cable from the midplane riser board.

NOTE At this point, all cables and connectors should be unplugged from the midplane riser board.

Step 12. Using a torx #15 driver, remove the five torx screws attaching the midplane riser board to the chassis.

Chapter 7 201
Removing and Replacing Components
Midplane Riser Board

Step 13. Grasp the top edge of the midplane riser board and lift straight up to release it from the keyway slots on the chassis.
Then pull straight out and up to remove the midplane riser board from the chassis.

Figure 7-31 Midplane Riser Board

3
1-5
2 Attaching screw
5 locations

Midplane riser
board

Replacing the Midplane Riser Board


To replace the midplane riser board, perform the following steps:

202 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Midplane Riser Board

Step 1. Replace the midplane riser board onto the keyway slots on the chassis wall. Then push straight down until it seats
onto the locking studs.

Step 2. Using a torx #15 driver, replace and tighten the 5 torx screws attaching the midplane riser board to the chassis.

Step 3. Plug in the QuickFind diagnostic board cable to the midplane riser board.

Step 4. Plug in the DVD relay board and front panel display board cable to the midplane riser board.

Step 5. Plug in the power distribution board power cable and signal cable to the midplane riser board.

Step 6. Replace the SCSI backplane board.

Step 7. Replace the I/O baseboard assembly.

Step 8. Replace the three chassis hot-swap fan units.

Step 9. Replace the processor extender board.

Step 10. Replace the memory extender board.

Step 11. Replace the front and top covers.

Step 12. Replace the front bezel.

Step 13. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server back into the rack until it stops.

Chapter 7 203
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Swap Power Supplies

Hot-Swap Power Supplies


The HP Integrity rx4640 Server has two 200-240 VAC hot-swap power supply units (PSU). These PSUs are located at the rear
of the HP server. The supported configuration of the HP Integrity rx4640 Server requires a minimum of one PSU be installed.

CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety
precautions could result in damage to the server.

NOTE A hot-swap device does not require interaction with the operating system before the device is removed from
or installed into the server.
The AC power to the server does not have to be off to remove or replace a hot-swap power supply.

Power Supply Load Order


The supported configuration of your hp Integrity rx4640 Server requires a minimum of one 200-240 VAC PSU. A second,
optional hot-swap PSU, may be installed to provide N+1 capability. Each hot-swap requires a separate power cord.
The left side (viewing from the rear) hot-swap PSU is identified as P 0, the second hot-swap power supply is identified as P 1.
Each hot-swap PSU requires a separate power cord be installed in the appropriate power cord receptacle and attached to a
power cord support bracket.

CAUTION The empty hot-swap PSU slot P 1 must remain closed with the supplied metal cover when a second PSU is
not used. Your server may be damaged due to overheating if the cover does not remain in place.

WARNING Be careful when installing a hot-swap power supply. It is heavier than it appears.

CAUTION If the system is powered down, install the hot-swap PSU into the server before attaching the new power cord
at the rear of the system. Failure to observe this caution will result in damage to the server.

Removing a Hot-Swap Power Supply


To remove a hot-swap PSU, perform the following steps:

CAUTION Be careful when removing the hot-swap power supply. It is heavier than it appears.

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server back out of the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the power cord plug from the power receptacle.

Step 3. Loosen the captive thumbscrew located at the top left of the PSU.

Step 4. Grasp the handle and pull the PSU out of the server.

204 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Swap Power Supplies

Replacing a Hot-Swap Power Supply


Step 1. Supporting the PSU with both hands, slide it into the empty slot until it plugs into the socket on the internal power
distribution board. Tighten the thumbscrew hand-tight.

Step 2. Install the power cord into the PSU socket.

Step 3. Apply power to the new PSU and the LED should immediately turn on.

Step 4. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server back into the rack until it stops.

Figure 7-32 Hot-Swap Power Supply Removal and Replacement

Chapter 7 205
Removing and Replacing Components
Power Distribution Board

Power Distribution Board


The power distribution board is attached to the rear power supply cage, underneath the hot-swap power supply fan unit.

WARNING Ensure that the system is powered down and all power sources have been disconnected from the server
prior to removing or replacing the power distribution board.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected.
This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position.
Failure to observe this warning could result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure will result in erratic system behavior or system failure.
For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service Provider.
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety
precautions could result in damage to the server.

Figure 7-33 Power Distribution Board Removal and Replacement

Power distribution board

Attaching
screw
hole

206 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Power Distribution Board

Removing the Power Distribution Board


To remove the power distribution board, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the top cover. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

Step 3. Remove the power supply fan unit from the chassis. See “Hot-Swap Chassis Fan Unit” on page 168.

Step 4. Remove the hot-swap power supply(s) from the chassis. See “Hot-Swap Power Supplies” on page 205.

Step 5. Unplug the power cable and the signal cable from the midplane riser board.

Step 6. Using a torx #15 driver, loosen the one torx screw attaching the power distribution board to the chassis.

Step 7. Push the power distribution board towards the center of the chassis to release it from the keyway slots. Pull it off
the keyway slots and up and out of the chassis.

Replacing the Power Distribution Board


To replace the power distribution board, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Replace the power distribution board over the keyway slots and push it towards the side of the chassis to lock it
onto the studs.

Step 2. Reattach the power distribution board to the chassis bulkhead by replacing the one torx #15 screw. Tighten
hand-tight.

Step 3. Replug the power and signal cables back into the midplane riser board.

Step 4. Replace the hot-swap power supply(s) into the chassis.

Step 5. Replace the power supply fan unit into the chassis.

Step 6. Replace the top cover.

Step 7. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server back into the rack until it stops.

Chapter 7 207
Removing and Replacing Components
DVD Drive

DVD Drive
The DVD drive is located on the front of the HP Server.

WARNING Ensure that the system is powered down and all power sources have been disconnected from the server
prior to removing or replacing a DVD drive.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected.
This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position.
Failure to observe this warning could result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure will result in erratic system behavior or system failure.
For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service Provider.

208 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
DVD Drive

Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety
precautions could result in damage to the server.

Figure 7-34 DVD Drive Removal and Replacement

Removing a DVD Drive


To remove a DVD drive, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Grasp the front of the DVD drive and squeeze in on the locking tab to release the drive.

Step 2. Remove the front bezel. See “Front Bezel” on page 144.

Step 3. Pull the drive straight out to remove it from the chassis.

Replacing a DVD Drive


To replace a DVD drive, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Grasp the front of the DVD drive and squeeze in on the locking tab to release the drive.

Step 2. Push the drive straight into the drive bay until the locking tab clicks into place.

Chapter 7 209
Removing and Replacing Components
DVD Drive

Step 3. Replace the front bezel.

210 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
DVD I/O Board

DVD I/O Board


The DVD I/O board is located under a metal cover that is directly under DVD location at the front left of the chassis.

WARNING Ensure that the system is powered down and all power sources have been disconnected from the server
prior to removing or replacing a DVD I/O board.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected.
This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position.
Failure to observe this warning could result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure will result in erratic system behavior or system failure.
For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service Provider.

Chapter 7 211
Removing and Replacing Components
DVD I/O Board

Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety
precautions could result in damage to the server.

Figure 7-35 DVD I/O Board Removal and Replacement

Cover

DVD I/O
board

Removing a DVD I/O Board


To remove a DVD I/O board, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the front bezel. See “Front Bezel” on page 144.

Step 3. Remove the front cover. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

Step 4. Remove the memory extender board. See “Memory Extender Board” on page 151.

212 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
DVD I/O Board

Step 5. Remove the processor extender board. See “Processor Extender Board” on page 160.

Step 6. Using a torx #15 driver, remove the two torx screws holding the DVD I/O board cover plate to the chassis and
remove the cover plate.

Step 7. Unfasten the release clip attaching the DVD I/O board to the chassis. and remove the I/O board from the chassis.

Step 8. Lift out the DVD I/O board and remove the midplane riser board connector cable and remove the DVD I/O board
from the chassis.

Replacing a DVD I/O Board


To replace a DVD I/O board, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Replace the DVD I/O board into the chassis and plug in the midplane riser board connector cable.

Step 2. Replace DVD I/O board to the chassis by refastening the release clip.

Step 3. Replace the cover plate using the two torx #15 screws and a torx #15 driver.

Step 4. Replace the processor extender board.

Step 5. Replace the memory extender board.

Step 6. Replace the front and top covers.

Step 7. Replace the front bezel.

Step 8. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server into the rack until it stops.

Chapter 7 213
Removing and Replacing Components
Display Board

Display Board
The display board is located behind the control panel and under the front cover. The display board contains the server’s on/off
switch and three LEDs that indicate server status.

WARNING Ensure that the system is powered down and all power sources have been disconnected from the server
prior to removing or replacing the display board.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected.
This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position.
Failure to observe this warning could result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure will result in erratic system behavior or system failure.
For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service Provider.

214 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Display Board

Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety
precautions could result in damage to the server.

Chapter 7 215
Removing and Replacing Components
Display Board

Figure 7-36 Display Board Removal and Replacement

216 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
Display Board

Removing the Display Board


To remove the display board, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the front bezel. See “Front Bezel” on page 144.

Step 3. Remove the front cover. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

Step 4. Using your finger, slightly pull out the retaining tab on the chassis that holds the display board in position.

Step 5. Gently unplug the midplane riser board connector cable from the display board and remove the board from the
chassis.

Replacing the Display Board


To replace the display board, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Gently plug in the midplane riser board cable into the display board.

Step 2. Hold the display board in position near the chassis and rotate it into the retaining clip until it clicks into place.

Step 3. Replace the front cover.

Step 4. Replace the front bezel.

Step 5. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server into the rack until it stops.

Chapter 7 217
Removing and Replacing Components
QuickFind Diagnostic Board

QuickFind Diagnostic Board


The QuickFind diagnostic board is located on top of the power supply cage, underneath the top cover.

WARNING Ensure that the system is powered down and all power sources have been disconnected from the server
prior to removing or replacing the QuickFind diagnostic board.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected.
This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position.
Failure to observe this warning could result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure will result in erratic system behavior or system failure.
For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service Provider.

218 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
QuickFind Diagnostic Board

Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety
precautions could result in damage to the server.

Figure 7-37 QuickFind Diagnostic Board Removal and Replacement

Cover

QuickFind
diagnostic board

Removing the QuickFind Diagnostic Board


To remove the QuickFind diagnostic board, perform the following steps:

Step 1. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server out from the rack until it stops. See “Accessing a Rack Mounted Server” on
page 141.

Step 2. Remove the top cover. See “Front and Top Covers” on page 145.

Chapter 7 219
Removing and Replacing Components
QuickFind Diagnostic Board

Step 3. Gently squeeze the cover surrounding the QuickFind diagnostic board and remove the cover/board assembly from
the top of the power supply cage.

Step 4. Turn this assembly upside down and remove the QuickFind diagnostic board from the cover.

Step 5. Unplug the cable from the connector on QuickFind diagnostic board and remove the board from the chassis.

Replacing the QuickFind Diagnostic Board


To replace the QuickFind diagnostic board, perform the following steps:

Step 1. Gently plug the cable into the QuickFind diagnostic board connector.

Step 2. Replace the QuickFind diagnostic board into the cover by snapping it into place.

Step 3. Turn the assembly over and snap into place on top of the power supply cage.

Step 4. Replace the top cover.

Step 5. If rack mounted, slide the HP Server into the rack until it stops.

220 Chapter 7
Removing and Replacing Components
QuickFind Diagnostic Board

Chapter 7 221
Removing and Replacing Components
QuickFind Diagnostic Board

222 Chapter 7
8 Parts Information

Field Replaceable Parts (FRU) List


The items in this list and the corresponding item numbers are the Field replaceable Units (FRUs) for the hp Integrity rx4640
Server.

NOTE The item numbers listed below are used with the part illustrations in order to identify the nomenclature of the
part. Part numbers are found by using the part nomenclature from this list to select the correct part from the
HP Partsurfer. If a system board needs to be replaced, remove processors, DIMMs, and adapter boards and
transfer these to the new board. Ensure all jumper and switch settings on the old board are transferred to the
new board.

Table 8-1 Field Replaceable Parts (FRU) List

Part Number Part Number


Item No. Description
Replacement Exchange

Cable

A6961-63006 Cable, Internal SCSI A6961-63006 None

A6961-63005 Cable, QuickFind Diagnostic to Midplane A6961-63005 None

A6961-63004 Cable, Power Distribution to Midplane Ribbon A6961-63004 None

A6961-63003 Cable, Power Distribution to Midplane 10 pin A6961-63003 None

A6961-63011 Cable, SCSI Controller Jumper (Simplex only) A6961-63011 None

A6961-63008 Cable, SCSI Backplane to Midplane A6961-63008 None

A6961-63002 Cable, Display to IDE to Midplane A6961-63002 None

PCA Boards

A6961-60007 PCA, Processor Extender A6961-67007 A6961-69007

A6961-60001 PCA, I/O baseboard (includes VRMs) A6961-67001 A6961-69001

A6961-60201 PCA, I/O Baseboard (includes VRMs) supports Wake On Lan A6961-67201 A6961-69201
Note: Requires system firmware greater than 1.13

A6961-60004 PCA, 16 slot Memory Board A6961-67004 A6961-69004

A6961-60104 PCA, 16 slot Memory Board, 4GB DIMM capable A6961-67104 A6961-69104
Note: Requires system firmware greater than 1.13

A7124-04001 PCA, 32 slot Memory Board A7124-67001 A7124-69001

A6961-04005 PCA, 32 slot Memory Board, 4GB DIMM capable


Note: Requires system firmware greater than 1.13

A6961-60005 PCA, Midplane Riser Board A6961-67005 None

Chapter 8 223
Parts Information
Field Replaceable Parts (FRU) List

Table 8-1 Field Replaceable Parts (FRU) List (Continued)

Part Number Part Number


Item No. Description
Replacement Exchange

A6961-04057 PCA, SCSI Backplane/Management Assy, includes: A6961-67057 None


Management board (A6961-60003) and SCSI Backplane board
(A6961-60002)

A6961-60006 PCA, SCSI Duplex Board A6961-67006 None

A6961-60106 PCA, SCSI Duplex Board A6961-67106 None

A6961-60008 PCA, Front Panel Display A6961-67008 None

A6961-60009 PCA, QuickFind Diagnostic Board (includes plastic cover and A6961-67009 None
label)

A6961-60015 PCA, Power Distribution Board A6961-67015 None

A6961-60013 PCA, I/O Board to DVD connectivity (IDE/USB) A6961-67013 None

1818-8797 256MB DIMM A6967-67001 None

1818-8795 512MB DIMM A6968-67001 None

1818-8833 1GB DIMM A6969-67001 A6969-69001

1818-8799 2GB DIMM A6835-67001 A6835-69001

Internal disks/removable media

A9896-64001 36GB 15K RPM SCSI Disk (A986A) 5065-5286EO A6848-69001

A7163-04001 73GB 15K RPM SCSI Disk (A987A) 0950-4381EO A9761-69001

A9898-64001 146GB 15K RPM SCSI Disk (A9898A) 0950-4385EO A7080-69001

A7163-04001 DVD-R/CD-R Drive A7163-67001 None

A7007-04001 DVD-R/CD-RW Drive A7007-67001 None

Fans

A6961-04001 I/O Fan A6961-04055 None

A6961-04028 Power Supply Fan A6961-04028 None

Processors

A7159-04001 1.3GHz Itanium 2 CPU A7159-67001 A7159-69001

A7158-04001 1.5GHz Itanium 2 CPU A7158-67001 A7158-69001

A9767-04013 hp mx2 dual processor module A6797AX A9730-69001

Miscellaneous

0950-4428 Power Supply A6961-67016 None

0950-4419 DC-DC Converter (VRM 3.3V) A6961-67017 None

224 Chapter 8
Parts Information
Field Replaceable Parts (FRU) List

Table 8-1 Field Replaceable Parts (FRU) List (Continued)

Part Number Part Number


Item No. Description
Replacement Exchange

0950-4418 DC-DC Converter (VRM 5.0V) A6961-67018 None

0950-4417 DC-DC Converter (VRM 12.0V) A6961-67019 None

A6961-04047 PCI Card Divider (doorbell and latch included) A6961-67020 None

A6961-40021 PCI Retention Clip A6961-67021 None

1420-0386 System battery 1420-0386 None

Rack solutions

5069-3305 Rack Mount Hardware, Right (included with Left Bracket in A6977-67001 None
kit)

5069-3306 Rack Mount Hardware, Left (included with Right Bracket in A6977-67002 None
kit)

A6961-04043 Bezel-Rack Mount A6977-67022 None

Core I/O Cards

A6825-60101 LAN Core I/O A6825-67101 None

A6829-60101 U160 Core I/O A6829-67001 None

309520-001 6402 U320 RAID Controller (Windows only) None None

Chapter 8 225
Parts Information
Field Replaceable Parts (FRU) List

226 Chapter 8
9 Specifications

Introduction
This chapter provides the power requirements, operating conditions (environmental requirements), physical requirements,
hardware specifications, and video resolutions of the hp Integrity rx4640. The following tables provide the specifications
required for normal operation of the hp Integrity rx4640.

NOTE The specifications and requirements for the power supply and environment can vary if you install a mass
storage device in the server that has more stringent environmental limits than required for the HP Server.
Ensure that the operating environment for any mass storage devices you intend to install are compatible with
the server environmental requirements.

Hardware Specifications
Table 9-1 Hardware Specifications

Micro-processors Intel Itanium (up to 4 processors):


1.1 GHz dual processor module 32MB Level 4 cache. Up to 4 modules or 8 processors
1.3 GHz/3MB
1.5 GHz/6MB

Memory Supports up to eight Double Data Rate (DDR) registered ECC Memory, in PC1600 DIMMs.
Supported DDR DIMM sizes: 128MB, 256MB, 513MB, 1GB, and 2GB. Requires DIMMs to
be added in quads of equal capacity.

Video Embedded

SCSI Integrated Ultra-3 SCSI dual channel controller; 80 MB/s transfer rate with two 68-pin
connectors.

integrated hp raid Optional.


controller

LAN PCI Gigabit, Fast Ethernet Controller; with Wake-on-LAN enabled/disabled via BIOS setup.

PCI Slots Four 64-bit PCI slots, 66MHz slots


Two 64-bit PCI-X slots, 133 MHz slots.

Core I/O Three serial ports, 2 USB ports, Integrated RJ-45 LAN .

DVD-ROM DVD-R/CD-ROM drive; IDE interface; 48x speed.

Mass Storage Maximum Internal Storage: Two 73MB, 15K drive.

External Storage 2 external SCSI ports

Power Supply N+1 configuration, redundant 200-240 VAC power supply (optional).

Chapter 9 227
Specifications
Dimensions and Weights

Dimensions and Weights


This section provides dimensions and weights of hp Integrity rx4640 Server components.

Server Component Dimensions


Table 9-2 Server Component Dimensions

Dimension Value

Height 6.87 in. (17.46 cm)

Width 17.32 in. (44 cm)

Depth 27.1 in. (68.8 cm)

Weight Unloaded 75 lbs (34 kg)


Fully loaded <95 lbs (43 kg)

228 Chapter 9
Specifications
Dimensions and Weights

Chapter 9 229
Specifications
Dimensions and Weights

230 Chapter 9
Index

A E
adapter E-Diag Tools, 135
slot number, determining with info command, 104 EFI
antistatic wrist strap, 141 capable devices
and controller handles, displaying, 104
B configurable components, displaying, 105
Battery, system driver handle, determining, 105
remove and replace, 149 EFI SCSI Setup Utility
Boot starting, 105
EFI boot manager, 87 Event logs
Booting CMC, 137
HP Server, 85 CPE, 137
Management processor, 136
C MCA, 137
Event Monitoring Service, EMS, 134
Chassis fan Extensible Firmware Interface
remove and replace, 168 commands, 88
commands Extensible Firmware Interface, EFI, 87
devtree
controller handle, determining, 105 F
EFI-capable devices and controller handles, displaying,
104 Fibre channel
boot configuration, 78
drvcfg
EFI configurable components, displaying, 105 Field Replacable Unit, FRU
list of, 223
EFI driver handle, determining, 105
Front Bezel
EFI SCSI Setup Utility, starting, 105 remove and replace, 144
info
adapter slot number, determining, 104
G
adapter’s path, determining, 104
configurable components, EFI capable, displaying, 105 Gigabit Ethernet card LAN LEDs, 27
controller handle, determining, 105
Core I/O H
connections, 71 handle
Covers, front and top controller, determining, 105
remove and replace, 145 Hot-Plug
OL-A, 53, 177
D OL-D, 53, 177
devtree command OL-R, 53, 177
controller handle, determining, 105 PCI-X, 53, 177
EFI-capable devices and controller handles, displaying, 104 Hot-Plug disk drives
Dimensions LEDs, 18
hp Integrity rx4640, 229 remove and replace, 196
DIMMs Hot-Swap power supplies
remove and replace, 154 remove and replace, 205
slot fillers, 155
Disk drives, Hot-Plug I
installing, 38 I/O, core, 71
Display board info command
remove and replace, 216 adapter path, determining, 104
drvcfg command adapter slot number, determining, 104
EFI configurable components, displaying, 105 Instant Support Enterprise Edition, ISEE, 134
EFI driver handle, determining, 105 IP address
EFI SCSI Setup Utility, starting, 105 default, 74
dump capture, 18
DVD drive L
remove and replace, 210
DVD I/O board LEDs
remove and replace, 213 Control Panel, 17
DVD, activity, 19
locations and functions, 15

231
Index

Power supply status, 25 S


SCSI
M backplane board
Management processor remove and replace, 199
accessing, 72, 109 duplex, converting to, 65
commands, 110 setup utility, 103
configuring for LAN, 74 simplex to duplex, 65
LEDs, 26 simplex, converting from, 65
network access, 73 specifying parameters, 103
terminal access to, 72 SCSI adapter
Memory DIMMs path
installing, 47 determining with info command, 104
Memory extender board Service Tools, 141
remove and replace, 151 slot number of adapter, determining with info command,
Midplane riser board 104
remove and replace, 202 Specifications
dimensions and weights, 229
N Hardware, 227
Support Tools Manager, 133
NMI Button, 18 System I/O board
LEDs, 22
O remove and replace, 172
Offline Diagnostic Environment, ODE, 135
T
P Troubleshooting
path, determining for adapter Online Support Tools, 133
with info command, 104 system I/O board, 132
PCI card dividers
remove and replace, 189 U
PCI cards Universal Serial Bus, 29
installing, 53, 177
PCI-X, 53, 177
Pinouts V
Connector, 29 Voltage regulator modules, VRM
LAN, 32 remove and replace, 193
SCSI Port, 33
Power Button, Main, 18
Power distribution board
remove and replace, 207
Power supplies
installing, 35
Processor
installing, 40, 162
remove and replace, 162
Processor extender board
remove and replace, 160
Processors
installing, 42, 162, 163
load order, 41

Q
QuickFind diagnostic board
remove and replace, 220
QuickFind Diagnostic Panel
LEDs, 19

R
Reflection 1, 72

232

You might also like